CURSO 2008 EPROMS

Solluciones a Sistem mas Electtrónicos Automotr A rices ENTR RENAMI MIENTO O TECN NICO LECT TURA DE D MEM MORIAS S AUTO

Views 39,852 Downloads 14 File size 30MB

Report DMCA / Copyright

DOWNLOAD FILE

Recommend stories

Citation preview

Solluciones a Sistem mas Electtrónicos Automotr A rices

ENTR RENAMI MIENTO O TECN NICO LECT TURA DE D MEM MORIAS S AUTO OMOTR RICES

mexico 22008

LICZNIK LIST

LICZNIK LIST ALFA ROMEO - 146 HC05 - 147 93c86 - 147 ST6249 - 156 HC11KG4 White - 156 HC11KG4 Black - 164 HC05 - 166 93c56 - 166 HC711 AUDI - TT HC912 - 100 93c46 VDO - A3 HC912 01 - A3 HC912 03 - A3 03 93c86 - A3/A4/A6 93c66 VDO v1 - A3/A4/A6 93c66 VDO v2 - A4 24c08 BOSCH - A4 93c46 VDO - A4 93c56 - A4 93c56 UKNSI 95 - A4 93c56 UKNSI 97 - A4 93c56 UKNSI 98 - A4 93c56 z komp VDO - A4 HC912 - A6 93c46 VDO - A6 93c56 UKNSI 97 - A6 93c86 VDO - A8 93c56 VDO 95 - A8 93c86 VDO 01 - A8 03 93c86 BMW - BMW - BMW - BMW - BMW

3 3 5 5

E36 91-98 2 Memory Blue Green IIC

CHRYSLER http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (1 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

- PT Cruser HC912 CITROEN - Berlingo HC08 - C2 Dash + BSI ( 93c46 + 95160 ) - C3 Dash + BSI ( 93c46 + 95160 ) - C5 Dash + BSI ( 68HC08 + 68HC912 ) - Evasion HC05H12 - Jumper 95040 - Jumpi HC08 - Xantia 93c46 - Xara 03 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 95160 ) - Xara 93c46 - Xara Picasso 2003 - Xara Picasso 93c66 - Xara Picasso v1 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 95160 ) - Xara Picasso v2 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + uPD780949 ) DACIA - Logan Sagem 93c56 DAEWOO - Kalos HC05H12 - Matiz HC05H12 FIAT - Brava 93c56 YazMeter - Brava HC(7)05 - Brava HC05E6 - Brava HC08 - Brava HC11KG4 - Brava ST6249 - Doblo 95040 - Ducato 25040 - Marea HC08 - Multipla 93c56 v1 - Multipla 93c56 v2 - Palio 95040 - Panda 95040 - Punto2 25040 - Punto2 25020 - Punto2 HC08 z obr. - Punto2 HC08 bez obr. - Punto3 95040 http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (2 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Scudo HC08 Scudo 95040 Seicento 25020 Seicento 25040 Stilo HC912D60 Tempra 93c46 v1 Tempra 93c46 v2 Tempra 93c06 Tipo Veglia 93c46 Tipo Borg 93c46 Tempra Borg 93c46

FORD - Escort HC11 - Fiesta HC11 - Fiesta NEC uPD780973 - Focus HC11 - Galaxy HC11 - Puma HC11 - Scorpio HC11 - WinStar HC11 - Ecoline 9S12DT256C - Escape 9S12H128 - Expedition 68HC912D60 - Explorer 68HC912DG128 - Explorer 68HC912D60 - Explorer 9S12DP256 - Fiesta 24c08 - Focus 24c16 - Focus 9S12H128 - Focus 06 24c16 - Focus C-Max 3M5T 9S12H256 - Focus C-Max 4M5T 9S12H256 - Fusion 24c08 - Fusion 06 93c66 - Galaxy VDO v1 93c86 - Galaxy VDO v2 93c86 - Mondeo 68HC912D60 - Transit 24c16 - Transit Kiencle 93c66 - Transit Kiencle 93c66 CRC HONDA http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (3 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Accord 93c56 Civic 01 93c56 HRV 93c46 Jazz 93c56 Legend 93c46 Shuttle 93c46

HYUNDAI - Matrix 93c46 - Santa Fe 93c46 - Hyundai NEC µPD780828 IVECO - Iveco 93s56 KIA - Carnival 93c46 - Clarus 93c46 - Rio 93c46 - Sorento 93c46 - Sportage 93c46 LANCIA - K Veglia Borletti HC11KG4 - K Veglia Borletti TMS370 - Libra Jaeger HC11KG4 MAZDA - 121 Visteon HC11E20 - 323/626 v1 93c56 - 323/626 v2 93c56 - 323/626 v1 93c46 - 323/626 v2 93c46 - Premacy 93c56 - 626 01 93c56 - MPV 93c46 MITSUBISHI - Carisma 93c46 - Colt 93c46 - Lancer 98 93c46 - Pajero 93c46 - SpaceStar 93c46 http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (4 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Galant 93c46 Outlander 03 93cs56 Pajero 93c56 Space Wagon 93c46 Shogun 93c46

MERCEDES - A Class 98 HC11KG4 - A Class 00 HC912 - A Class Dash + BCU ( 93c66 + 68HC05 ) - Actros tacho - C Class 93c56 - C Class 95 93c56 - E Class 00 93c86 - E Class 93c56 - Motometer - SLK/CLK 93c56 - Smart VDO 93c66 - Sprinter Kienzle 24c02 - Sprinter 24c02 - Sprinter 93s46 - VDO 93c56/93c66 - Vito CDI Jaeger - Vito CDI tacho - Vito 04 ST95080 - Vito tacho - Vito 05 ST95080 NISSAN - Primera 93c46 - Micra 93c46 - Micra 93c66 OPEL - Astra H M35080 - Astra VDO 93c56 - Astra TRW - Frontera DELCO Atmel 752 - Vectra B 93c46 - Vectra C 93c66 - Astra VDO 93c46 - Omega 93c46 - Senator 93c46 - Signum 93c66 http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (5 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Montery 99 93c46 Opel NEC µPD780828 Zafira TRW 24c02 Zafira VDO 93c56

PEUGEOT - 206 Jaeger 2002 - 206 Jaeger HC05H12 - 206 Dash + BSI ( 95020 + 95160 ) - 306 Sagem v1 93c56 - 306 Sagem v2 93c56 - 406 BSI v1 93c66 - 406 BSI v2 93c66 - 406 v1 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 93c66 ) - 406 Jaeger HC05 - 406 Sagem 93c46 - 607 VDO - 806 Jaeger HC05H12 - Expert Jaeger HC08 - Partner Jaeger 2003 - Partner Jaeger HC08 - Partner 03 Dash + BSI ( 95020 + 95160 ) - Partner Dash + BSI ( 68HC08 + µPD780949 ) RENAULT - Clio III Sagem 25020 - Clio Jaeger HC08 - Clio Sagem 93c46 - Clio 04 93c56 - Espace Jaeger TMS370 - Espace 2002 - Espace 2003 93c56 - Kangoo Jaeger HC08 - Kangoo Sagem 93c46 - Laguna Jaeger TMS370 - Laguna Sagem v1 93c46 - Laguna Jaeger HC08 - Laguna Jaeger HC12 - Master 2004 93c66 - Megane Jaeger HC08AB32 - Megane Jaeger HC11KG4 - Megane Sagem 93c46 - Megane Visteon 93c56 http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (6 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Safrane v1 93c46 Safrane v2 93c46 Safrane v3 93c56 Scenic 00 HC08 Scenic 04 93c56 Trafic 01 95020 Renault v1 NEC µPD780973 Renault v2 NEC µPD780973

SEAT - Alhambra HC11 - Aroza 24c02 - Cordoba 00 93c66 - Cordoba 93c46 - Ibiza VDO - Ibiza VDO 03 93c86 - Ibiza VDO 93c66 - Inka 93c66 - Leon 93c66 - Leon v1 93c86 - Leon v2 93c86 - Leon v3 93c86 - Toledo VDO 01 93c86 - Toledo VDO 24c16 SKODA - Fabia VDO 93c86 - Fabia VDO 03 93c86 - Felicia 93c66 - Octavia 00 93c86 - Octavia 01 93c86 - Octavia 02 93c86 - Octavia v1 93c66 - Octavia v2 93c66 - Octavia2 24c16 - Octavia2 24c32 SUZUKI - Swift VDO 05 93c66 - Liana 04 93c56 TOYOTA - Allion 93c46 - Alteza 93c46 http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (7 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Ardeo Denso 93c46 Aristo Denso 93c46 Avalon Denso 98 93c46 Avalon VDO 93c56 Avensis Denso 93c46 Avensis Yazaki 93c46 Avensis VDO 93c56 Camry 96-03 93c46 Camry Denso 05 93c56 Camry Yazaki 93c46 Carina Yazaki 93c46 Caldina Yazaki 93c46 Celica Denso 00-02 93c46 Chaser Denso 93c46 Corolla Denso 93c46 Corolla Sagem 93c46 Corolla VDO 93s56 Corolla VDO 93c56 Corona Yazaki 93c46 Cressida 97-99 93c46 Crown Denso 93c46 Duet Denso 93c46 Echo Denso 93c46 Estima 96 93c46 Fielder Denso 93c46 Ipsum 96 93c46 Forerunner Yazaki 93c56 Forerunner v1 93c66 Forerunner v2 93c66 Fucargo 99-01 93c46 HighLander 01 93c46 Harrier Denso 93c46 HDJ100 Yazaki 93c56 Hiace Yazaki 93c46 Kluger Denso 93c56 LandCruiser 90 93c56 LandCruiser 100 93c56 Prada/Prado 93c56 Prada/Prado 93c66 RAV 4 96-01 93c46 Yaris 93c46

VOLVO http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (8 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

850 v1 93c46 850 v2 93c46 850 93c56 S40 93c56 S70 97 93c56 S60 01 HC12 S70 00 HC908 S70 00 HC12 S70 01 HC12 S80 00 HC908 S80 01 HC12 V40 93c56 UKNSI

VW - Bora VDO 93c86 - Caddy VDO 24c16 - Caddy VDO 24c32 - Corrado Motometer 93c56 - Corrado VDO 93c56 - Golf 3 Diesel 93c46 - Golf 3 Motometer v1 93c56 - Golf 3 Motometer v2 93c56 - Golf 3 TRW 93c46 - Golf 3 VDO 93c46 v1 - Golf 3 VDO 93c46 v2 - Golf 4 Motometer 24c02 - Golf 4 VDO 00 93c86 - Golf 4 VDO 01 93c86 - Golf 4 VDO 93c46 - Golf 4 VDO 93c66 - Golf 5 24c16 - Golf 5 24c32 - Lupo 24c02 - LT35 24c02 tacho - LT35 93s46 - Passat B5 VDO v1 93c66 - Passat B5 VDO v2 93c66 - Passat 95 93c56 - Passat B6 VDO v1 93c86 - Passat B6 VDO v2 93c86 - Passat B6 VDO v3 93c86 - Passat GT 93c46 - Passat GT 93c56 http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (9 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

-

Passat Jaeger v1 68HC711KG2 Passat Jaeger v2 68HC711KG2 Passat Motometer 24c08 Passat Motometer 93c56 Passat Motometer 96 93c56 Passat VD202 93c46 Passat VDO 91 93c56 Passat B7 24c32 Polo Motometer 24c02 Polo Motometer 93c46 Polo VDO 01 93c86 Polo VDO 02 93c86 Polo VDO 96-98 93c46 Sharan 68HC11E9 Sharan VDO v1 93c86 Sharan VDO v2 93c86 Sharan VDO v3 93c86 Touran VDO v1 24c16 Touran VDO v2 24c16 Touran VDO 24c32 T4 Motometer 93c56 T4 VDO 93c66 T5 VDO 03 93c86 T5 VDO v1 93c86 T5 VDO v2 93c86 Tuareg 24c08 Tuareg 93c46 Vento TRW 93c46 Vento VDO 93c46 Motometer 24c02 #10 Motometer 24c02 #20 Motometer 24c02 #30 Motometer 24c02 #40 Motometer 24c02 #50 Motometer 24c02 #60 Polo Motometer 02 24c02 Phaeton v1 24c08 Phaeton v2 24c08

http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (10 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

IMMO KILLER

IMMO KILLER - podporované jednotky Alfa Romeo 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04 Audi A3,A4,A6 Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo) BMW Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo) Citroen IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli Citroen Berlingo - BSI - MCU NEC Citroen C3- BSI - MEM 95160 Citroen Xara - BSI - MEM 95040 Citroen Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040 Citroen EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo) Citroen MA 3.0 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo) Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 3.2 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 7.2 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 7.3 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo) Citroen SID 803 PIN calculator (95320) Citroen SID 803 PIN programmer (95320) Daewoo Siemens TMS374 Fiat Bosch - 24C02 Fiat IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Mirelli Fiat IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli Fiat 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 Fiat BPKA DELCO HC11F1 Fiat Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11 Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9 Fiat IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9 Fiat IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 Fiat IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374 Fiat IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040 Fiat IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID) http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (1 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]

IMMO KILLER

Fiat IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1 Fiat IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11 Fiat Lucas DCU3F 95080 Iveco Daily Bosch 24C16 Kia Siemens TMS374 Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. ? Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2 Mercedes Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU Mercedes Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU Mercedes Start Error - Sprinter Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC05 Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC08 Mercedes Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU Opel Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey) Opel DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white) Opel DTL - Bosch Opel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356 Opel 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo) Opel 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo) Opel Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010 Opel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo) Peugeot MP5.1.1 - Bosch Peugeot S2000 - Sagem Peugeot BSI - De/encryption Peugeot ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr. Peugeot EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog. Peugeot EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog. Peugeot EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3) Peugeot EDC16 PIN calculator (95160) Peugeot 206 BSI - MCU HC912 Peugeot 206 BSI - MEM 95160 Peugeot 307 BSI - MCU HC912 Peugeot 307 BSI - MEM 95160 Peugeot 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 Peugeot ECU SAGEM S2000 PIN progr. Peugeot IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374 Peugeot IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Peugeot IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Peugeot IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374 Peugeot IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374 http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (2 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]

IMMO KILLER

Peugeot IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400 Peugeot IAW 8P.XX Magneti Marelli HC11A8 MCU Peugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512 Peugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512 Polonez Delco HC11F1 Renault 5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli Renault DCI - Bosch Renault DCI - Delphi Renault DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo Renault DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo Renault SIRIUS32 - Siemens Renault SIRIUS34 - Siemens Renault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug) Renault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs) Renault Fenix 3 95160 Renault IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370 Renault IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370 Renault IAW5NR2.C5 95160 Renault S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM Renault Siemens TMS374 Renault Siemens TMS374 Renault Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo) Rover 214,216 93C46 Skoda SIMOS - Siemens Toyota Land Cruiser 93LC66 Toyota YarisDenso 93C46 V.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens V.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens V.A.G IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo V.A.G IMMO VW LT - HC05X16 V.A.G IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g Megamos V.A.G EDC16 Remove Immo (95320) V.A.G. EDC16 Bosch 95320 V.A.G. TDI - Bosch V.A.G. TDI 24C02 (1 plug) Bosch V.A.G. TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Bosch

http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (3 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

GTI-TDI Forum » FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden » Tachonummern Letzter Beitrag | Erster ungelesener Beitrag

» Hallo Gast [Anmelden|Registrieren]

Druckvorschau | An Freund senden | Thema zu Favoriten hinzufügen

Tachonummern Autor

firebird73 Mitglied Dabei seit: 05.03.2006 Beiträge: 49 Herkunft: 1120 Wien / Österreich

« Vorheriges Thema | Nächstes Thema »

Beitrag Tachonummern

Vielleicht ist das ja für euch von Interesse, hab ich im Internet gefunden. AUDI A3 8L0919860A - Audi A3 VDO with 93C66 EEPROM 8L0919860D - Audi A3 with 93C66 - VDO110.008.894/001 A4 AUDI A4 - 8D0919033A - UK NSI - 93C56 - sw B AUDI A4 - 8D0919033P - VDO - 93C56 AUDI A4 - 8D0919860E - JAPAN with 93LC56 AUDI A4 - 8D0919861A - UK-NSI with 93LC56 AUDI A4 - 8D0919861C - 1998 - VDO 110.008.884/002 - AUZ7Z0 AUDI A4 - 8D0919910Q - 1999 - VDO - 93C66 AUDI A4 - 8D0920860E - VDO year 1997 with 93C66 AUDI A4 - 8D0920880E - B5-VDO year 1997 with 93C66 AUDI A4 - 8D0920900H - 1999/2000y. - VDO 110.008.938/006 - AUZ7Z0 AUDI A4 - 8D0920930 - 1999- dash Magneti Marelli with HC912 AUDI A4 - 8D0920931 - VDO AUDI A4 - 8E0920900G - 2001 AUDI A4 - UK NSI new - 1996 - 93C56 - sw A Audi A4 VDO A6 AUDI AUDI AUDI AUDI AUDI AUDI

A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

-

1995-2,8i - 93C46 - VDO 4A1919033HG - 1997- 93C46 - VDO 4B0919-900C,F,G,M,930A,K,931B,932K,L,Q - AUZ7Z0 with 93C86 4B0919860F - JAPAN with 93LC56 4B0919860L - UK-NSI with 93LC56 sw A 4B0919880G - AUW0 with 93C66

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (1 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

AUDI AUDI AUDI AUDI AUDI

A6 A6 A6 A6 A6

-

4B0919881A - AUX0 with 93C66-1999 4B0920900Q - HC912 -- MM4 8D0919033C - UK NSI - 93C56 - sw B 8D0919880M - 1998 - VDO (1,9TDi) 8D0920900M - HC912DG128

TT AUDI TT - 8N1919880E - HC912 VW BEETLE BEETLE BEETLE BEETLE BEETLE BEETLE BEETLE BEETLE

- dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 919 901C - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 920 901F - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912DG128 - 1C0 919 951L - dash Magneti Marelli - MC912DG128 - 1C0 920 840A 1998 - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 919 861A 2000 - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 919 901X 2000 - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 920 800A

BORA VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW

BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA BORA

-

1J0919861F-MMO - Motometer 24C02 1J0920801E-A4V - 1999 - Motometer 93C86 1J0920801E-BOO - 24C02 - Motometer 1J0920805E-BOO - Motometer 24C02 1J0920806E - engine 1,9SDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO 1J0920806G - 24C08 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer 1J0920821B-B00 - Motometer 24C02 - 2000 1J0920821BX - year 2000 VDO 1J0920822B-BOO - Motometer 24C02 1J0920822C - 24C02 - 1,9TDi - 2000 - Motometer 1J0920826B - Motometer 24C08 - 1,9TDi ,2001y. 1J5920806C-A4V - Motometer 93C86 1J5920825C-A4V - Motometer 93C86 1J5920826A-A4V - Motometer 93C86 1J5920826C-A4V - Motometer 93C86 1J5920906K-A4V55 - VDO - 93C86

Caddy CADDY - 1T0 920 861A - 24C32 - VDO - 2005 CADDY - 2K0 920 840E - 24C16 - VDO - 2004 CADDY - 2K0 920 841A - 24C32 - VDO - 2004 CORRADO CORRADO - 535 919 033AP - 1993 - VDO - 93C46 CORRADO - 535 919 042AC - VDO - 93C46 CORRADO - Motometer 1993 - 93C56 (14pin) GOLF

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (2 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF

III - 1H0919861E - TRW 93C46 III - 1H0919864Q - TRW 93C46 III - 1H0919860A year 96 TRW 93C46 III - 1H0919860H - CL-TDI- 94 TRW 93C46 III - 1H0919860T - 1,9TD 93C56 Motometer III - 1H0919861B - 1,9D - 1997- 93C56 Motometer SW 5.1 III - 1H0919864J - 1995 - VDO - 93C46 III - 1H0919880A - 2,0i 8V- 95 TRW 93C46 III - 1H6919033A - 1,9TD VDO - 93C46 III - 1H6919033BD - 1,9TD r.v.1993 VDO - 93C46 III - 1H6919033M - 1,9TD VDO - 93C46 III 1,9D - 1992- 93C56 Motometer SW 5.8 IV - 1J0920820B - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO IV - 1J0920820C - 93C86 - 1997 - VDO IV - 1J5920825C - 93C86 VDO IV - 1J0919860 - 93C66 IV - 1J0919860D - VWV - 24C02 - 1999 - MOTOMETER IV - 1J0919860D - VWX - 24C02 MOTOMETER IV - 1J0919861D - 24C02 - 1,6SR 1999 - Motometer IV - 1J0919880B-MMO - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0919881B - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0919881D - 24C02 IV - 1J0919911 - MMO - 24C02 MOTOMETER IV - 1J0919931D - 93C66 IV - 1J0920801E - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0920802G BOO version - 24C02 - 1999 - Motometer IV - 1J0920805E - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0920805F - 93C86 - VDO - 2001 IV - 1J0920805G - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0920806B - V02 - 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J0920806B-PV - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0920806C - 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J0920806E - engine 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J0920821A - 24C02 - Motometer IV - 1J0920821B - year 1999 dash VDO with 93C86 IV - 1J0920822C - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer IV - 1J0920825 - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - Motometer IV - 1J0920825B - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer IV - 1J0920826A - 24C08 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer IV - 1J0920846C - 2002-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J0920906J - GTi - 2002-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J0920925A - 24C02 - 2001 - Motometer IV - 1J0920926F - 93C86 - VDO - American model (MPH) IV - 1J0920991A - 93C66 IV - 1J5920806G - 2003-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J5920826 - 2003-93C86 - VDO IV - 1J5920826B - 2001-93C86 - VDO2 IV - 1J5920826C - 2003-93C86 IV - 1J5920845C - 93C86 - VDO IV - 1J5920846A - 2002-93C86 - VDO V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850E - 2003 V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850F - 2003 V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850L - 2003

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (3 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF GOLF

V V V V V V V V V V

-

24C16 24C16 24C16 24C32 24C32 24C32 24C32 24C32 24C32 24C32

-

VDO VDO VDO VDO VDO VDO VDO VDO VDO VDO

dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard dashboard

-

1K0920850P - 2004 1K0920860K - 2003 1K0920860L - 2004 1K0920851A - 2004 1K0920851B - 2004 1K0920851F - 2004 1K0920851H - 2004 1K0920861 - 2004 1K0920861M - 2005 1K0920961B - 2005

JETTA JETTA - 1K0 920 971C - 24C32 - VDO - 2005 JETTA 1,9TDi - 1J0920806L - 2002-93C86 - VDO JETTA 1,9TDi - 1J0920906K - 2002-93C86 - VDO (USA version) LUPO VW LUPO - 6X0920801D - BOO - 24C02 - Motometer PASSAT PASSAT - 357919033FC - 1993 - VDO - 93C46 PASSAT B4 - 3A0919860H - 1,9TDi - Motometer - 93C56 y.1996 PASSAT B5 - 3B1919860C - V018 with 93C66 PASSAT B5 - 3B1919880D - VWW1 with 93C66 PASSAT B5 - 3B1919880G - VWW1 with 93C66 PASSAT B5 - 3B1919890J - VWW0 with 93C66 VW PASSAT - 1J0919860B - 93C66 VW PASSAT - 1J0920842B - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT - 3A0919033R - 93C56 Motometer - 94year VW PASSAT - 3B0920802A B5 VDO V20 version !!!! - 93C86 - 1998 VW PASSAT - 3B0920802A BOO V18 version !!!! - 24C02 - 1999 - Motometer VW PASSAT - 3B0920822A - 93C86 - 2000y - VDO VW PASSAT - 3B0920847E - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT B5 (B5V01) - 3B0920846AX - 93C86 - VDO - 2001 VW PASSAT B5 (B5V01) - 3B0920926B - 93C86 - VDO - 2001 VW PASSAT B5 (B5V06) - 3B0920927A - 93C86 - VDO VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920805A - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920847A - 93C86 - 2001 - VDO VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920829-B5V04 - VDO - 93C86 VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920829A-B5V04 - VDO - 93C86 VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920929B-B5V03 - VDO - 93C86 VW PASSAT B5V1 1997y. VDO 3B0 920 861B - 93C66 VW PASSAT B5V11 - 3B0920825A - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO VW PASSAT B5V2 - VDO 3B0919881N - 93C66 VW PASSAT B6 (B6V08 ) - 3B0920827A - 93C86 - VDO VW PASSAT B6 - 3B0920807A - 93C86 - VDO VW PASSAT B7 -2005- VD1 3C0920870G - VDO - 24C32 VW PASSAT B7 -2005- VD1 3C0920870L - VDO - 24C32 VW PASSAT B7 -2006- VD1 3C0 920 870A - VDO - 24C32 VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - VAG> 2U0035860 - (860D) VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - VAG> 3B0919880A http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (4 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - sw V13AC or V11AB - 3B0919861 VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 (B5) Magneti Marelli - VAG> 3B0919860D POLO VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW VW

POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO POLO

- 6K9 920 806B - 2000y. - 24C04 - TRW - 6N0 919 860P - 1995 Motometer - 93S56 - 6N0 919 860R - year 1996 Motometer - 1,4i - 93S56 - 6N0 919 861A - Motometer 24C02 - 6N9 920 804D - 24C04 - TRW - 6Q0 920 800 - 2002 VDO 93C86 - 6Q0 920 800M - VDO - 93C86 - 6Q0 920 800P - year 2002 VDO 93C86 - 6Q0 920 900H - year 2002 VDO 93C86 1,4MPi / 1997 - dash 6K9 919 033AK - VDO with 93C46 1,9TD / 1996 - dash Motometer with 93C66

SHARAN Sharan 2 - 3B0920825A - 93C86 - 2002 - VDO VW Sharan - 7M0 919 882D - with Motorola HC11E9 VW Sharan - 7M1 919 863B - with Motorola HC11E9 VW Sharan - 7M1 919 881 - with Motorola HC11A20 VW Sharan - 7M3 920 820C - 93C86 - 2000 VW Sharan - 7M3920840N - 93C86 - VDO VW Sharan - 7M5920800EX - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO TOUAREG TOUAREG - 2004 - 2,5TDi - 7L6 920 880M - BOSCH TOUAREG - 2004 TDi - dash 7L6 920 870L TOUAREG - 2004 TDi - dash 7L6 920 880N - BOSCH TOURAN Touran Touran Touran Touran Touran Touran

-

1T0 1T0 1T0 1T0 1T0 1T0

920 920 920 920 920 920

850A - 24C16 - VDO - 2003 860A - 24C16 - VDO - 2003 860C - 24C16 - VDO - 2003 860G - 24C16 - VDO - 2003 861A - 24C32 - VDO - 2004-2005 870F - 24C16 - VDO - 2005

23.04.2006 19:03

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (5 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

pepi Routinier Dabei seit: 09.11.2005 Beiträge: 360 Herkunft: vilnius lt

verschiedene für SEAT und SKODA Freunde

SEAT ALHAMBRA - 7M0920821H - 68HC11E20 (3E82K) ALHAMBRA - 7M0919862B - 68HC11E20 (3E82K) ALHAMBRA - 7M7920840C - VDO - 93C86 ALHAMBRA - 7M7920840H - VDO - 93C86 AROSA - . . . . . . . . . Motometer - 24C02 CORDOBA - 6K0920821E - VDO - 93C66 CORDOBA - . . . . . . . Motometer - 24C02 IBIZA - . . . . . . . . . . VDO - 93C46 IBIZA - 6K0920850F - VDO - 93C66 IBIZA - . . . . . . . . . . . -VDO - 93C46 INCA - 6K0919033FE - VDO - 93C46 INCA - 6K0919033HP - VDO - 93C46 INCA - 6K0920850 - VDO - 93C66 LEON - 1M0920800 - VDO - 93C86 LEON - 1M0920820 - VDO - 93C86 LEON - 1M0920821B - VDO - 93C86 LEON - 1M0920822E - VDO - 93C86 TOLEDO -VDO992655681 - VDO - 93C46 TOLEDO -1M0920801B - VDO - 93C86 SKODA FABIA - 6Y0920860M - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y0920880M - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1919860C - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1919870B - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1919870C - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1919870D - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1919880C - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1919880D - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1920870H - VDO - 93C86 FABIA - 6Y1920880H - VDO- 93C86 FELICIA - 6Y1919860C - VDO - 93C86 FELICIA - 6Y1919880C - VDO - 93C86 OKTAVIA - 1U0920810B - VDO - 93C86 OKTAVIA - 1U0920810F - VDO - 93C86 OKTAVIA - 1U0920811B - VDO - 93C86 OKTAVIA - 1U1919033A - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919033C - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919033G - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919033J - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919033L - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919034A - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919034B - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919034C - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919034G - VDO - 93C66

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (6 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

OKTAVIA - 1U1919034L - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U1919034S - VDO - 93C66 OKTAVIA - 1U0920810B - VDO - 93C86 OKTAVIA - 1U0920811B - VDO - 93C86 OKTAVIA - 1U0920811F - VDO - 93C86 SUPERB - 3UO920810C - VDO - 93C86 SUPERB - 3U0920811A - VDO - 93C86 SUPERB - 3U0920840A - VDO - 93C86 23.04.2006 21:17 Baumstruktur | Brettstruktur Gehe zu: FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden GTI-TDI Forum » FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden » Tachonummern

Forensoftware: Burning Board 2.3.3, entwickelt von WoltLab GmbH

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (7 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

ECU list ver 18_01_08 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove Immo - ECU works without immo No description - ECU cleared and prepared for coding / autocoding -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Alfa Romeo 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04 Audi A3,A4,A6 Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo) BMW Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo) Chrysler Voyager 2.5 TD, Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo) Citroen IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli Citroen Berlingo - BSI - MCU NEC Citroen C3- BSI - MEM 95160 Citroen Xara - BSI - MEM 95040 Citroen Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040 Citroen EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo) Citroen MA 3.0 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo) Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 3.2 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 7.2 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo) Citroen MP 7.3 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo) Citroen SID 803 PIN calculator (95320) Citroen SID 803 PIN programmer (95320) Daewoo Siemens TMS374 Fiat Bosch - 24C02 Fiat IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Mirelli Fiat IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli Fiat 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 Fiat BPKA DELCO HC11F1 Fiat Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11 Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9 Fiat IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9 Fiat IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 Fiat IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374 Fiat IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat IAW 1G7SP.71 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 (c/r immo) Fiat IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040 Fiat IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID) Fiat IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1 Fiat IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11 Fiat Lucas DCU3F 95080 Iveco Daily Bosch 24C16 Kia Clarus 2.0 16V Bosch 24C02 Kia Siemens TMS374 Mazda 323 Diesel Denso 93C56 Mercedes A class - Siemens/VDO 29F200 Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. ? Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2 Mercedes Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU Mercedes Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU Mercedes Start Error - Sprinter Mercedes Start Error - Sprinter (EWS OK) Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC05 Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC08 Mercedes Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU Página 1

Opel Opel Opel Opel Opel Opel Opel Immo) Opel Opel Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Polonez Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Immo) Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Rover Skoda Toyota Toyota V.A.G V.A.G. V.A.G V.A.G V.A.G V.A.G

ECU list ver 18_01_08 Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey) DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white) DTL - Bosch Motronic based on 24C02 - Bosch Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo) 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010 Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo) MP5.1.1 - Bosch S2000 - Sagem (95080) S2000 RPM - Sagem (95080) S2000 - Sagem (95080) PIN progr. BSI - De/encryption ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr. ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN calc. EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog. EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog. EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3) EDC16 PIN calculator (95160) 206 BSI - MCU HC912 206 BSI - MEM 95160 307 BSI - MCU HC912 307 BSI - MEM 95160 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374 IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374 IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400 IAW 6LP2.02 Magneti Marelli ST10F280 IAW 8P.XX Magneti Marelli HC11A8 MCU Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512 Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512 Delco HC11F1 5NR.XX - Magneti Marelli DCI - Bosch DCI - Delphi DCI - Delphi (remove crash blockade) DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo Megane 2 (clear steering lock) 24C04 SIRIUS32 - Siemens SIRIUS34 - Siemens SIRIUS35 - Siemens 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug), (Remove 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs) Fenix 3 95160 IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370 IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370 IAW5NR2.XX 95160 S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM Siemens TMS374 Siemens TMS374 Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo) 214,216 93C46 SIMOS - Siemens 93LC66 + Texas 4C (Key programmer) YarisDenso 93C46 EDC16 Remove Immo (95320) EDC16 Bosch 95320 IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo IMMO VW LT - HC05X16 Página 2

V.A.G V.A.G. 95040 V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G.

ECU list ver 18_01_08 IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g Megamos ME7.1.(x) - 7.5.(x) Remove Immo Bosch SIMOS - Siemens, 93C76, (Remove Immo) TDI - Bosch TDI 24C02 (1 plug) Bosch TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Bosch

Página 3

Eliminazione IMMO CODE – Riverginatura file – Adattamento per preparazione all’auto-ricodifica -------------------------------------------------------------------------Alfa Romeo Alfa Romeo 156 Alfa Romeo

- 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04 5 connettori - ECU - BOSCH Twin Spark, Remove Immo - ECU - BOSCH 0 261 204 772 - 24C02 memory

Audi A3,A4,A6

- Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)

BMW

- Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)

Citroen Citroen Citroen Citroen

-

Daewoo

- Siemens TMS374

Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat Fiat

-

Iveco Daily

- Bosch 24C16

Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes Mercedes

-

Kia

- Siemens TMS374

Opel Opel Opel Opel Opel

-

IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo) MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo) EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)

IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Marelli Bosch - 24C02 IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374 Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 BPKA DELCO HC11F1 IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040 IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9 IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9 IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160 IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160 IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160 IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160 IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11 Lucas DCU3F 95080 IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1 IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374

Start Error - Sprinter Start Error - Vito HC05 Start Error - Vito HC08 C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. 1/2 C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2 Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU A Class Siemens/VDO (29F200)

DTL - Bosch DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white) Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey) Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 93C56 Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010

Opel Opel Opel

- Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo) - 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo) - 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)

Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot Peugeot

-

Polonez

- Delco HC11F1

PSA PSA PSA PSA PSA

- MP 7.2 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02) - MP 7.3 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02) - MA 3.0 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46) - MA 3.1 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46) - MP 3.2 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)

Group Group Group Group Group

S2000 - Sagem MP5.1.1 - Bosch IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374 Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512 Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.XX HC11A8 MCU 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374 IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400 IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374 IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512 S2000 RPM Sagem (95080)

Rover

- 214,216 (93C46)

Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault Renault

-

Skoda

- SIMOS - Siemens

Toyota Yaris Toyota Land Cruiser

- Denso 93C46 - 93LC66

V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G.

– -

DCI - Bosch DCI - Delphi DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo SIRIUS32 - Siemens SIRIUS34 - Siemens 5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli Siemens TMS374 Fenix 3 95160 IAW5NR2.C5 95160 Siemens TMS374 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs) 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug) IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370 IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370 Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo) S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM

TDI Bosch Bosch EDC15 EDC16

Bosch TDI 24C02 (1 plug) TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Remove Immo (24c04) Remove Immo (95320)

Calcolo PIN / Programmazione PIN -------------------------------------------------------------------------Audi A2

- PIN decoder loaded 93C86-16

CITROEN CITROEN CITROEN CITROEN PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT PEUGEOT

/ / / / / /

Berlingo C3 Xara Xara Picasso

-

BSI BSI BSI BSI

-

MCU MEM MEM MEM

CITROEN CITROEN CITROEN CITROEN CITROEN CITROEN

-

BSI - De/encryption EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog. EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog. ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr. EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3) EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)

206 206 307 307

-

BSI BSI BSI BSI ECU

- MEM - MCU - MCU - MEM SAGEM

NEC 95160 95040 95040

95160 HC912 HC912 95160 S2000

PIN progr.

PSA PSA

- SID 803 (Siemens) PIN calculator (95320) - SID 803 (Siemens) PIN programmer(95320)

V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G. V.A.G.

-

EDC16 Bosch 95320 IMMO 5WK4 678 IMMO 5WK4 678 IMMO 6X0 953 257 IMMO VW LT IMMO White box -

HC05 - Siemens HC05 - Siemens 24C04 - Valeo HC05X16 93C46 - f+g Megamos

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

************************************************************************** Immo Tool - Universal ECU / IMMO dump repair tool ************************************************************************** ************************************************************************** Software version 2.08.07 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault - Sirius 35 clear immo (29F400) Renault - Sirius 34 clear immo (29F200) type 1 Renault - Megane 2 clear Steering loock (24C04) Peugeot - IAW6LP2.02 MM clear immo ST10F280 Software version 17.03.07 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault - 1.9 DTI Bosch (1 plug) (NEW ALGO-Remove Immo) V.A.G - SIMOS, Siemens, remove immo (93C76) Software version 11.03.07 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat - IAW 1G7SP.71 MM, clear/remove immo (HC11F1) Fiat - IAW 59F.M2,M3,M7,M9 (NEW ALGO) (95080) Fiat - IAW AF.M1,M7,M9,S2 (NEW ALGO) (95160) Fiat - IAW 5NF.T1 (NEW ALGO) (95160) Fiat - IAW 1ABB.92 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374) Fiat - IAW 1ABG.81 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374) Fiat - IAW 1AF.1G (NEW ALGO) (TMS374) Fiat - IAW 1AF.13,15,17 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374) Renault - Sirius 34 (NEW ALGO) (29F400) Renault - 1,5 DCI (remove crash blockade) (ST10F280+95160) Software version 15.01.07 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------BMW - SIEMENS MS 41.0 DME Chrysler Voyager - Bosch 24c02 remove immo KIA - CLARUS 2.0 16V Bosch (24C02) Mazda - 323 Diesel, Denso ECU (93C56) Mercedes - Start Error (5P08C3) - WSP OK OPEL - Motronic based on 24C02 V.A.G. - ME7.1.(x)-7.5.(x) Bosch Remove Immo (95040)

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (1 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------PEUGEOT / CITROEN - ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN calc. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------- User interface changes

************************************************************************** Software version 2.08.06 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------V.A.G - EDC16 Remove Immo (95320) PSA - MP 7.2 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02) PSA - MP 7.3 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02) PSA - MA 3.0 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46) PSA - MA 3.1 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46) PSA - MP 3.2 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46) Peugeot - S2000 RPM Sagem (95080) Mercedes Benz - A Class Siemens/VDO (29F200) -------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------PSA - SID 803 (Siemens) PIN calculator (95320) PSA - SID 803 (Siemens) PIN programmer(95320) ************************************************************************** Software version 16.06.06 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Audi A3,A4,A6 - Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo) BMW - Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo) Citroen - MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo) Citroen - MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo) Opel - 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo) Opel - 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo) Peugeot - Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.XX HC11A8 MCU -------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Peugeot / Citroen - EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3) Peugeot / Citroen - EDC16 PIN calculator (95160) http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (2 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------- User interface changes - BB nr1 firmware update, Bus busy detection

************************************************************************** Software version 18.04.06 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Citroen - EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo) Fiat - IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1 Fiat - IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat - IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat - IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Fiat - IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Opel - Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010 Opel - Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo) Peugeot - IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Peugeot - IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Peugeot - IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374 Peugeot - Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512 Renault - Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo) Renault - S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM V.A.G. - Bosch TDI 24C02 (1 plug) V.A.G. - Bosch TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) -------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------New BB nr1 firmware (ver. 0.0.3) - 95P08/5P08C3 memory programmer support added (BB nr1) - Buffer verify function added - Large user interface changes

************************************************************************** Software version 30.12.05 - last upate in 2005 :) ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Opel - Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey) Opel - Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356 http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (3 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

Peugeot FIAT Iveco Daily

- IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400 - Lucas DCU3F 95080 - Bosch 24C16

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Auto programm mode selector function added Quick P.S voltage selector USB/RS232 converters support improvements Verifivation errors algo changes New BB nr1 firmware (ver. 0.0.2) -

Added 24C128, 24C256 I2C memory support Added uWire 9346,56,66,86 - 8 and 16 mode memory support Added SPI 95010, 95020, 95040 memory support RS232 transparent mode added Bootloader protocol changes

************************************************************************** Software version 11.12.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault - IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370 Renault - IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Byte swap function added. Front end changes. Programmer comunication protocol changes ************************************************************************** Software version 16.11.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Mercedes - Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU Mercedes - Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU Mercedes - Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU -------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Create bin file function added. Screen dump function added. Cr 16 programmer. http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (4 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

************************************************************************** Software version 26.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Drag & Drop support Parameter start-up Universal file contents XOR procedure ************************************************************************** Software version 19.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat - IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID) Fiat - IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID) Fiat - IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID) Fiat - IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID) ************************************************************************** Software version 19.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat - BPKA DELCO HC11F1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Obliczanie/programowanie PIN. Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------V.A.G - IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens V.A.G - IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens V.A.G - IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo V.A.G - IMMO VW LT - HC05X16 V.A.G - IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g Megamos -------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features -------------------------------------------------------------------------I2C programmer (Hardware requiered BB nr1) ************************************************************************** Software version 8.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat - IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (5 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

Fiat Fiat Fiat

- IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040 - IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9 - IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9

************************************************************************** Software version 7.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault - 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug) Peugeot - IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374 Fiat - IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat - IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat - IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat - IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160 Fiat - IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11 ************************************************************************** Software version 6.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------V.A.G. - EDC16 Bosch 95320 ************************************************************************** Software version 5.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault - 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs) ************************************************************************** Software version 3.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Alfa Romeo - 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04 Fiat - Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11 Fiat - 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 Peugeot - 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3 ************************************************************************** Software version 1.09.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault - Siemens TMS374 http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (6 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

Renault Renault Renault Toyota Yaris Toyota Land Cruiser Fiat Peugeot Peugeot Daewoo Kia Polonez Rover

-

Fenix 3 95160 IAW5NR2.C5 95160 Siemens TMS374 Denso 93C46 93LC66 IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374 IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374 Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512 Siemens TMS374 Siemens TMS374 Delco HC11F1 214,216 93C46

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features -------------------------------------------------------------------------SPI programmer (hardware required BB nr1) ************************************************************************** Software version 21.08.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------PEUGEOT / CITROEN - ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr. PEUGEOT - ECU SAGEM S2000 PIN progr. -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Opel - DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white) ************************************************************************** Software version 20.08.05 ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat - Bosch - 24C02 Mercedes - C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. 1/2 Mercedes - C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2 Opel - DTL - Bosch Peugeot - MP5.1.1 - Bosch Renault - 5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli Skoda - SIMOS - Siemens ************************************************************************** Software version 18.08.05 (first version) ************************************************************************** -------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN. -------------------------------------------------------------------------http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (7 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

CITROEN Berlingo - BSI - MCU NEC CITROEN C3 - BSI - MEM 95160 CITROEN Xara - BSI - MEM 95040 CITROEN Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040 PEUGEOT / CITROEN - BSI - De/encryption PEUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog. PEUGEOT / CITROEN - EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog. PEUGEOT 206 - BSI - MEM 95160 PEUGEOT 206 - BSI - MCU HC912 PEUGEOT 307 - BSI - MCU HC912 PEUGEOT 307 - BSI - MEM 95160 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file -------------------------------------------------------------------------Citroen - IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli Fiat - IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli Fiat - IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Marelli Mercedes - Start Error - Sprinter Mercedes - Start Error - Vito HC05 Mercedes - Start Error - Vito HC08 Peugeot - S2000 - Sagem Renault - DCI - Bosch Renault - DCI - Delphi Renault - DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo Renault - DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo Renault - SIRIUS32 - Siemens Renault - SIRIUS34 - Siemens V.A.G. group - TDI - Bosch ---------------------------------------------------------------------------

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (8 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

Eurocheck



La empresa



Potenciación



Inmovilizadores



GNC / GLP



Reparaciones de ECU



Zócalos Inteligentes



Presión Positiva



Contáctenos

Zócalos Inteligentes Al realizar una conversión de unidad de mando para GNC, GLP o alcohol, utilizamos zócalos Bi-Fuel. Este zócalo, se monta en la ECU a convertir en lugar de la memoria eprom original. Sobre el zócalo, se monta otra memoria (de doble capacidad respecto a la original) con la información original del vehículo y además, la nueva información de combustible alternativo. El zócalo Bi-Fuel gestiona la conmutación de los bancos de la memoria, para que el vehículo tome lectura de la información correspondiente al combustible usado.

Diseñamos y fabricamos todos los modelos de zócalos para todo tipo de vehículo. Utilizamos materiales de primera calidad, placas testeadas electrónicamente, y un sistema de control de calidad que nos permite reducir el margen de fallas al mínimo.

Zócalo Bi Fuel

Zócalo Jump. Orig

Zócalo Jumpeado

Algunos Vehículos

E-110 (Memoria original) 27C256 (Memoria a Montar) 27C512

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (1 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29





Chevrolet Corsa ● Vectra ● Astra Daewo Espero ● Nubira

Eurocheck

E-120 (Memoria original) 27C512 (Memoria a Montar) 27C010

Chevrolet Corsa ● Vectra ● Astra Daewo Espero ● Nubira



● ●

27C256 27C512 ●

E-130 (Memoria original) 27C512Latch (Memoria a Montar) 27C010



Renault 19 ● Clio VW Gol 1000



Peugeot 205



E-140

E-120 con 27C512

E-210 (Memoria original) 27C512 (Memoria a Montar) 27C010

● ● ●

Twingo VW Gol VW Polo

E-220 (Memoria original) 28F512 (Memoria a Montar) 27C010

Renault Megane ● VW Gol Chevrolet Corsa 16V



● ●

27C010 27C020



E-210SE (Memoria original) 27C512 (Memoria a Montar) 27C010

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (2 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29



Peugeot 306

Eurocheck

E-220SE (Memoria original) 28F512 (Memoria a Montar) 27C010

● ●

27C010 27C020



Peugeot 306

E-310 (Memoria original) 29F200 (Memoria a Montar) 29F400

● ●

29F400 29F800

● ●

Peugeot 206 Renault Clio 2 ● Kangoo

E-311 (Memoria original) 29F200 (Memoria a Montar) 29F400

● ●

29F400 29F800



VW Golf 4

Módulos de Ford Ford, a diferencia de las demás empresas automotrices, desarrolla sus propias unidades de mando y sistemas electrónicos. La arquitectura electrónica de los vehículos Ford, está pensada para facilitar los trabajos de potenciación e implementación de sistemas Bi-Fuel (GNC, GLP y alcohol).

Las unidades de mando de éstos vehículos (EEC) disponen de un conector (J3), por donde se accede a los datos e información de memoria. Contamos con un Lector/Programador Ford con el cual leemos estos datos para luego modificarlos en función de las necesidades de nuestros clientes (ya sea potenciación o gestión de combustibles alternativos) y que además, programa nuestros propios módulos. Los módulos programados, ya sea con la información de potenciación, o bien con la necesaria para gestión de combustibles alternativos, se conectan en el J3 y el vehículo entiende que desde ese momento en adelante, no tiene que leer más la memoria eprom original, sino que debe leer la nueva memoria instalada dentro del módulo. Para que el vehículo vuelva a su estado original, no hay más que desconectar este módulo.

Es posible potenciar y realizar conversiones Bi-Fuel (GNC, GLP,

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (3 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29

Eurocheck

alcohol) a todo vehículo marca Ford y VW con sistema de inyección Ford (Mercosur, Autolatina año 1993 a 1996).

Para mas información puede ver Equipos para reprogramaciones.

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (4 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29

SOFTWARE

SOFTWARE FIAT IMMO 1.1

488 with 5P08C3 MEM ECU - BOSCH with 24C02 memory e.g. ECU - DELCO BPKA 2 plugs(beige+red) ECU - HITACHI MFI 003BC2 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 16F.XX ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 18F.B4 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 1ABB.92 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 1AF.1G ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 49F.B4 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M1 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M7 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M9 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.S2 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 59F.Mx (Hybrid) ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 5NF.T1 ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8F.5T ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8F.6B ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.22

Mercedes START-ERROR

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (1 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

SOFTWARE

RENAULT IMMO 1.1

ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU

-

5NR2.C5 M.M. 95160, Delete Immo DCI Bosch DCI Delphi DCU3R Lucas, Clear Immo DCU3R Lucas, Delete Immo DTI Bosch ( 1 plug ) DTI Bosch ( 2 plugs ) FENIX1 BVA Siemens HC11, Delete Immo FENIX3 Siemens HC11E9, Clear Immo

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (2 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

SOFTWARE

ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU ECU

-

FENIX3 Siemens HC11E9, Delete Immo FENIX5 Siemens TMS374 IAW 6R.2030 TMS370, Delete Immo SIRIUS32 Siemens, Clear Immo SIRIUS32 Siemens, Delete Immo SIRIUS34 Siemens, Clear Immo SIRIUS34 Siemens, Delete Immo

LICZNIK - prepočet kilometrov

podporované jednotky TU IMMO KILLER - vypnutie immo v BSI a riadiacích jednotkách

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (3 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

SOFTWARE

podporované jednotky TU

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (4 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

Tipos de Immo Immo Tipo “ B “

Immo Tipo “ A “ Las flechas señalan para ambos casos, el circuito donde se colocaran las pinzas. El punto rojo indicaque es la pata # 1 y la posición del lado blanco pintado sobre las pinzas al momento de colocar. Pinza lado blanco.

Componente chicle de color azul. •

Solamente el Immo tipo “A” es necesario poner en corto con un caimán para poderse leer, estas patas son las dos de la orilla de las tres patas del componente que tiene forma de un chicle de color azul. y que por la parte inferior del Immo son las únicas tres que sobresalen, por lo cual es fácil identificarlas

Parte inferior del Immo tipo “ A “ El Vag-Pin cuenta con dos botones al frente, el botón lado izquierdo es el botón de reset y el acceso a leer el código de 4 dígitos del Immo, el botón derecho nos sirve para escoger el tipo de Immo a leer sea tipo “ A “ o tipo “ B “ . En caso de colocar mal las pinzas el Vag-Pin mostrara en su pantalla error en pinzas, es importante verificar que las pinzas estén haciendo perfectamente el contacto con las 8 patas del componente y que no quede ninguna pata de la pinza por encima del componente, y una vez que sea leído, verificar dos veces mas que te de el mismo numero de Immo, eso para descartar la posibilidad de haber inducido ruido al momento de colocar las pinzas. El Vag-Pin se alimenta del conector de diagnostico de cualquier auto con conector tipo OBD2, y se enciende desde el momento que se conecta.

Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic

List of vehicles covered from function odometer change via OBDII: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Audi Q7 (CAN) Audi A2 (K) Audi A3 (CAN) up to 2007 !!! Audi A3 VDO/M73 up to 2003 (K) Audi A4 VDO/M73 (K) Audi A4 BOSCH - RB4 clusters (CRYPTO eeproms R/W by OBDII) Audi A6 VDO (K) Audi A6 (CAN) Audi Allroad (K) up to 2004 Audi A8 (K) VDO93xx Audi A8 (CAN) up to 2007 !!! Audi TT (K) Seat Alhambra (K) Seat Altea (CAN) Seat Arosa (K) Seat Cordoba after 1999 (K) Seat Ibiza VDO after 1999 (K) Seat Leon (K+CAN) Seat Toledo (K+CAN) Skoda Octavia (K) Skoda Octavia II (CAN) Skoda Superb (K) Skoda Roomster (K) Skoda Scout (CAN) Skoda Fabia (K) VW Bora (K) VW Beetle (K) VW Caddy (CAN) VW EOS (CAN) VW Golf4 VDO/Motometer/BOSCH RB VW Golf5 VDO (CAN) VW Golf5 VISETEON VW Crossgolf (CAN) VW Individual (CAN) VW Jetta (K+CAN) VW Passat B5/B6 (K+CAN) VW Polo VDO/Motometer (K) VW Sharan (K) VW T4/T5 VDO (K) VW Touaran VDO (CAN) VW Touaraeg VW Phaeton Bentley Continental

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (1 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23

Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic ●

Porsche Cayenne

List of vehicles covered from function security access code/login reading via OBDII: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Audi A2 Audi A3 (CAN) up to 2007 !!! Audi A3 VDO/M73 up to 2003 (K) Audi A4 VDO (K) Audi A4 BOSCH (K) up to 2001 Audi A4 after 2000 - petrol engines >= 1.8 Audi A6 VDO (K) Audi A6 (CAN) petrol engines Audi Allroad (K) up to 2004 Audi Allroad (CAN) petrol engines Audi A8 up to 2001 Audi A8 from 2001 to 2002 2.5TDI Audi A8 (CAN) 2003+ petrol Audi TT (K) Audi Q7 petrol engines Seat Altea (CAN) Seat Cordoba after 1999 (K) Seat Ibiza (VDO) after 1999 (K) Seat Leon (K+CAN) Seat Toledo (K+CAN) Skoda Octavia Skoda Octavia II (CAN) Skoda Superb Skoda Roomster Skoda Scout (CAN) Skoda Fabia VW Bora VW Beetle VW Caddy (CAN) VW EOS (CAN) VW Golf4 VDO/Motometer/BOSCH RB VW Golf5 VDO (CAN) VW Crossgolf (CAN) VW Individual (CAN) VW Jetta (K+CAN) VW Passat B5 (K) B6(CAN) VW Polo5 VW Sharan after year 2000 VW T5 VW Phaeton petrol VW Touareg petrol VW Touaran VDO (CAN)

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (2 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23

Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic ●

PORSCHE Cayenne (CAN/K)

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (3 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23

1.1 Introduction The ETSMARTUSB MICRO programming adapter designed for easy access to Motorola M68HC11/M68HC05 families of microcontrollers. The ETSMART MICRO programming adapter lets you program unsecured members of the M68HC11/MC68HC05 MCU families via serial boot strap mode. 1.2 ETSMARTUSB MICRO programming adapter hardware The main features of the MICRO programming adapter are shown in the following figure:

PIN 1

Control LED

Activity LED

PIN 1

Target IC ISP header To target IC connector

ETMARTUSB header To ETSMARTUSB programmer connector

Master MCU

Figure 1

© ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools 1

1.3 Device programming example Explore OPEL SC303 car radio; target MCU – MC68HC11E9

Figure 2 Select Device

Figure 3 Select Crystal Frequency

8000

Figure 4 The default value is 4000kHz (4Mhz). Set the frequency value according to the crystal value (see Figure 8). Connect the MICRO programming adapter to the target hardware then connect the explored car radio to the power supply source (see Figure 7). Attach MICRO programming adapter to ETSMARTUSB via flexible pin-to-pin cable then attach target device to 10-pins programming adapter header J2 (see Figures 5, 6, 7, 8). © ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools 2

J1

J1

J2

J2 1 - TxD;2 - RxD; 3 - out1;4 - out2; 5- VCC;6 - VCC; 7 -GND;8 - GND; 9, 10 - + 10 V;

1 3 5 7 9

2 4 6 8 10

Figure 5

43Kohm © ETL 2005-2007

Figure 6

Microcontroller Tools 3

Figure 7

8000 kHz crystal Pin №7 – EXTAL Pin №8 – XTAL

Figure 8 The Figure 8 displayed connection between target equipment and MICRO programming adapter. ETL strongly recommend use the laboratory power supply source with current protection feature. A car battery is a bad © ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools 4

alternative to the laboratory power supply source during research and tests. 1.4 MICRO programming adapter schematic capture

Figure 9

© ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools 5

User's Manual for

BeeHive4 Fast universal 4x 48-pindrive concurrent multiprogramming system

ELNEC s.r.o. Presov, Slovakia September 2005

ELNEC s.r.o.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 - 2005 ELNEC s.r.o. This document is copyrighted by ELNEC s.r.o., Presov, Slovakia. All rights reserved. This document or any part of it may not be copied, reproduced or translated in any form or in any way without the prior written permission of ELNEC s.r.o. The control program is copyright ELNEC s.r.o., Presov, Slovakia. The control program or any part of it may not be analyzed, disassembled or modified in any form, on any medium, for any purpose. Information provided in this manual is intended to be accurate at the moment of release, but we continuously improve all our products. Please consult manual on www.elnec.com. ELNEC s.r.o. assumes no responsibility for misuse of this manual. ELNEC s.r.o. reserves the right to make changes or improvements to the product described in this manual at any time without notice. This manual contains names of companies, software products, etc., which may be trademarks of their respective owners. ELNEC s.r.o. respects those trademarks.

ZLI-0297A

2

ELNEC s.r.o.

Table of contents Introduction ...............................................................................................................................4 BeeHive4 elements ................................................................................................................6 Manipulation with the programmed device.............................................................................6 Selftest and calibration ...........................................................................................................7 Technical specification ...........................................................................................................7 Setup ........................................................................................................................................12 Software setup .....................................................................................................................12 Hardware setup ....................................................................................................................16 Programming a device ...........................................................................................................19 Engineering mode ................................................................................................................19 Production mode ..................................................................................................................23 Troubleshooting and warranty ..............................................................................................27 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................27 If you have an unsupported target device ............................................................................28 Warranty terms .....................................................................................................................28

Please, download actual version of manual from ELNEC WEB site (www.elnec.com), if current one will be out of date.

Conventions used in the manual References to the control program functions are in bold, e.g. Load, File, Device, etc. References to control keys are written in brackets , e.g. .

Terminology used in the manual: Device ZIF socket Buffer USB port HEX data format

any kind of programmable integrated circuits or programmable devices Zero Insertion Force socket used for insertion of target device part of memory or disk, used for temporary data storage type of port of PC. format of data file, which may be read with standard text viewers; e.g. byte 5AH is stored as characters '5' and 'A', which mean bytes 35H and 41H. One line of this HEX file (one record) contains start address and data bytes. All records are secured with checksum.

3

ELNEC s.r.o.

Introduction BeeHive4 is fast universal 4x 48-pindrive concurrent multiprogramming system designed for high volume production programming with minimal operator effort. The chips are programmed at near theoretical maximum programming speed. BeeHive4 supports all kinds of types and silicon technologies of today and tomorrow programmable devices without family-specific module. You can be sure the next devices support require the software update and (if necessary) simple package converter (programming adapter), therefore the ownership cost are minimized. BeeHive4 provides very competitive price coupled with excellent hardware design for reliable programming. It has probably best "value for money" programmer in this class. BeeHive4 consists of four independent isolated universal programming modules, based on the BeeProg programmer hardware. Therefore the sockets can run asynchronously (concurrent programming mode). Each programming module starts programming as soon as the new chip is correctly inserted to the ZIF of programming module. It result three programming modules works while you replace the programmed chip at the fourth. The operator merely removes the finished chip and inserts a new chip. Operator training is therefore minimized. Modular construction of hardware - the programming modules works independently allows for continuing operation when a part of the circuit becomes inoperable. It also makes service quick and easy. BeeHive4 interfaces with the IBM PC/compatible, portable or desktop personal computers through USB (2.0) port. BeeHive4 provides very fast programming due to high-speed FPGA driven hardware and execution of time-critical routines inside of the programmer. FPGA based totally reconfigurable 48 powerful TTL pindrivers provide H/L/pull_up/pull_down and read capability for each pin of socket. Advanced pindrivers incorporate high-quality highspeed circuitry to deliver signals without overshoot or ground bounce for all supported devices. Pin drivers operate down to 1.8V so you'll be ready to program the full range of today's advanced low-voltage devices. BeeHive4 performs on each programming module device insertion test (wrong or backward position) and contact check (poor contact pin-to-socket) before it programs each device. These capabilities, supported by overcurrent protection and signature-byte check help prevent chip damage due to operator error. BeeHive4 has a built-in protection circuits for eliminate damage of programmer and/or programmed device due to environment or operator failure. All ZIF socket pins of BeeHive4 programmer are protected against ESD up to 15kV.

4

ELNEC s.r.o. BeeHive4 has the selftest capability, which allows run diagnostic part of software to thoroughly check the health of the each programming module. BeeHive4 performs programming verification at the marginal level of supply voltage, which, obviously, improves programming yield, and guarantees long data retention. BeeHive4 provides a banana jack for ESD wrist straps connection to easy-to-implement the ESD protection control. Various socket converters are available to handle device in PLCC, SOIC, PSOP, SSOP, TSOP, TSSOP, TQFP, QFN (MLF), SDIP, BGA and other packages. It is important to remember that in most cases new devices require only a software update due to the BeeHive4 is truly universal programmer. With our prompt service you can have new devices can be added to the current list within hours! See AlgOR (Algorithm On Request) service for details at www.elnec.com. Advanced design including protection circuits, original brand components and careful manufacturing allows us to provide a three-year warranty on parts and labour for the BeeHive4 (limited 25,000-cycle warranty on ZIF sockets). This warranty terms are valid for customers, who purchase a programmer directly from Elnec company. The warranty conditions of Elnec sellers may differ depending on the target country law system or Elnec seller’s warranty policy. Free additional services: • free lifetime software update via Web site. Free software updates are available from our Internet address www.elnec.com. • Online technical support is available within promised 24 hours time limit or you may call us during business hours from Monday through Friday 8:30 to 17:30 (CET). • Keep-Current is a service by which ELNEC ships to you the latest version of the control program for programmer and the updated user documentation. A KeepCurrent service is your hassle-free guarantee that you always have access to the latest software and documentation, at minimal cost. • AlgOR (Algorithm On Request) service allows you to receive from ELNEC software support for programming devices not yet available in the current device list.

5

ELNEC s.r.o.

BeeHive4 elements c 48 pin ZIF socket d LED indicators for work result e LED indicator power f Banana jack for connecting ESD wrist strap

g Type B USB connector for PC ↔ BeeHive4 communication cable h Power switch i Power supply connector

Manipulation with the programmed device After selection of desired device for your work, you can insert into the open ZIF socket (the lever is up) and close socket (the lever is down). The correct orientation of the programmed device in ZIF socket is shown on the picture near ZIF socket on the

6

ELNEC s.r.o. programmer's cover. The programmed device is necessary to insert into the socket also to remove from the socket when LED BUSY is off. Note: Programmer's protection electronics protect the target device and the programmer itself against either short or long-term power failures and, partly, also against a PC failure. However, it is not possible to grant the integrity of the target device due to incorrect, user-selected programming parameters. Target device may be not destroyed by forced interruption of the control program (reset or switch-off PC), by removing the physical connection to the programmer, but the content of actually programmed cell may remains undefined. Don't unplug the target device from the ZIF socket during work with device (LED BUSY shine).

Selftest and calibration If you feel that your programmer does not react according to your expectation, please run the programmer selftest using Diagnostic POD, enclosed with the standard delivery package. For optimal results with programmer we also recommend you to perform extended test by the calibration test procedure every 6 months at least. See instructions for selftest in the Programmer menu.

Technical specification SPECIFICATION (valid for each programming module) HARDWARE Base unit, DACs • USB 2.0 port • on-board intelligence: powerful microprocessor and FPGA based state machine • three D/A converters for VCCP, VPP1, and VPP2, controllable rise and fall time • VCCP range 0..8V/1A • VPP1, VPP2 range 0..26V/1A • autocalibration • selftest capability • protection against surge and ESD on power supply input, parallel port connection

7

ELNEC s.r.o.

Socket, pindriver • 48-pin DIL ZIF (Zero Insertion Force) socket accepts both 300/600 mil devices up to 48-pin • pindrivers: 48 universal • VCCP / VPP1 / VPP2 can be connected to each pin • perfect ground for each pin • FPGA based TTL driver provides H, L, CLK, pull-up, pull-down on all pindriver pins • analog pindriver output level selectable from 1.8 V up to 26V • current limitation, overcurrent shutdown, power failure shutdown • ESD protection on each pin of socket (IEC1000-4-2: 15kV air, 8kV contact) • continuity test: each pin is tested before every programming operation

DEVICE SUPPORT (valid for each programming module) Programmer

• EPROM: NMOS/CMOS, 2708, 27xxx and 27Cxxx series, with 8/16 bit data width, full support for LV series • EEPROM: NMOS/CMOS, 28xxx, 28Cxxx, 27EExxx series, with 8/16 bit data width • Flash EPROM: 28Fxxx, 29Cxxx, 29Fxxx, 29BVxxx, 29LVxxx, 29Wxxx, 49Fxxx series, from 256Kbit to 32Mbit, with 8/16 bit data width, full support for LV series • Serial E(E)PROM: 24Cxxx, 24Fxxx, 25Cxxx, 45Dxxx, 59Cxxx, 25Fxxx, 25Pxxx, 85xxx, 93Cxxx, NVM3060, MDAxxx series, full support for LV series • Configuration (EE)PROM: XCFxxx, XC17xxxx, XC18Vxxx, EPCxxx, AT17xxx, 37LVxx • 1-Wire E(E)PROM: DS1xxx, DS2xxx • PROM: AMD, Harris, National, Philips/Signetics, Tesla, TI • NV RAM: Dallas DSxxx, SGS/Inmos MKxxx, SIMTEK STKxxx, XICOR 2xxx, ZMD U63x series • PLD: Altera: MAX 3000A, MAX 7000A, MAX 7000B, MAX 7000S, MAX7000AE • PLD: Lattice: ispGAL22V10x, ispLSI1xxx, ispLSI1xxxEA, ispLSI2xxx, ispLSI2xxxA, ispLSI2xxxE, ispLSI2xxxV, ispLSI2xxxVE, ispLSI2xxxVL, LC4xxxB/C/V/ZC, M4-xx/xx, M4A3-xx/xx, M4A5-xx/xx, M4LV-xx/xx • PLD: Xilinx: XC9500, XC9500XL, XC9500XV, CoolRunner XPLA3, CoolRunner-II • other PLD: SPLD/CPLD series: AMI, Atmel, AMD-Vantis, Gould, Cypress, ICT, Lattice, NS, Philips, STM, VLSI, TI • Microcontrollers 48 series: 87x41, 87x42, 87x48, 87x49, 87x50 series • Microcontrollers 51 series: 87xx, 87Cxxx, 87LVxx, 89Cxxx, 89Sxxx, 89LVxxx, all manufacturers, Philips LPC series • Microcontrollers Intel 196 series: 87C196 KB/KC/KD/KT/KR/... • Microcontrollers Atmel AVR: AT90Sxxxx, ATtiny, ATmega series • Microcontrollers Cypress: CY8Cxxxxx • Microcontrollers ELAN: EM78Pxxx • Microcontrollers MDT 1xxx and 2xxx series • Microcontrollers Microchip PICmicro: PIC10xxx, PIC12xxx, PIC16xxx, PIC17Cxxx, PIC18xxx, dsPIC series • Microcontrollers Motorola (Freescale): 68HC05, 68HC08, 68HC11 series • Microcontrollers Myson MTV2xx, 3xx, 4xx and 5xx series • Microcontrollers National: COP8xxx series • Microcontrollers NEC: uPD78xxx series

8

ELNEC s.r.o. • Microcontrollers Scenix (Ubicom): SXxxx series • Microcontrollers SGS-Thomson: ST6xx, ST7xx, ST10xx series • Microcontrollers TI: MSP430 and MSC121x series • Microcontrollers ZILOG: Z86/Z89xxx and Z8xxx series • Microcontrollers other: EM Microelectronic, Fujitsu, Goal Semiconductor, Hitachi, Holtek, Princeton, Macronix, Winbond, Infineon(Siemens), NEC, Samsung, Toshiba, ... Notes: • For all supported devices see actual Device list on www.elnec.com

Package support • support all devices in DIP with default socket • package support includes DIP, SDIP, PLCC, JLCC, SOIC, SOP, PSOP, SSOP, TSOP, TSOPII, TSSOP, QFP, PQFP, TQFP, VQFP, QFN (MLF), SON, BGA, EBGA, FBGA, VFBGA, UBGA, CSP, SCSP etc. • support devices in non-DIP packages up to 48 pins with universal adapters • programmer is compatible with third-party adapters for non-DIP support

Programming speed Notes: • It is important to know, we always use random numbers pattern for programming speed testing. Some our competitors use "sparse" pattern, where only few nonBlank data are programmed or are there are used data with only few 0 bits (FE, EF, etc.). This cheating approach can "decrease" programming time considerable. If you plan to compare, ask always which pattern they use. • The programming speed depends on PC speed only slightly. Device M50FW080 (parallel Flash) AM29DL323DB (parallel Flash) AM29DL640 (parallel Flash) AT45D081 (serial Flash) AT89C51RD2 (microcontroller) PIC18F452 (microcontroller)

Conditions:

Size [bits] 100000Hx8 (8 Mega) 208000Hx16 (32 Mega) 400080Hx16 (64 Mega) 108000Hx8 (16 Mega) 10000Hx8 4000Hx16

Operation programming and verify programming and verify programming and verify programming and verify programming and verify programming and verify

Time B 32 sec 38 sec 76 sec 43 sec 15 sec 4 sec

P4, 2,4GHz, USB 2.0, Windows XP, 2.18 version of SW

SOFTWARE • Algorithms: only manufacturer approved or certified algorithms are used. Custom algorithms are available at additional cost. • Algorithm updates: software updates are available approx. every 2 weeks, free of charge. • Main features: revision history, session logging, on-line help, device and algorithm information

Device operations • engineering mode • standard: • intelligent device selection by device type, manufacturer or typed fragment of part name

9

ELNEC s.r.o. • automatic ID-based selection of EPROM/Flash EPROM • blank check, read, verify • program • erase • configuration and security bit program • illegal bit test • checksum • security • insertion test, reverse insertion check • contact check • ID byte check • special • production mode (automatic start immediately after device insertion) • auto device serial number increment • statistic • count-down mode • production mode All operations are controlled by project file. • standard: • blank check, read, verify • program • erase • configuration and security bit program • illegal bit test • checksum • security • insertion test, reverse insertion check • contact check • ID byte check • special • production mode (automatic start immediately after device insertion) • auto device serial number increment • statistic • count-down mode

Buffer operations Only for engineering mode. • view/edit, find/replace • fill/copy, move, byte swap, word/dword split • checksum (byte, word) • print

Supported file formats • unformatted (raw) binary • HEX: Intel, Intel EXT, Motorola S-record, MOS, Exormax, Tektronix, ASCII-spaceHEX • Altera POF, JEDEC (ver. 3.0.A), e.g. from ABEL, CUPL, PALASM, TANGO PLD, OrCAD PLD, PLD Designer ISDATA, etc.

10

ELNEC s.r.o.

SPECIFICATION (BeeHive4 multiprogramming system) • 4x universal programming module (4x 48-pin DIL ZIF sockets) • operation result LEDs, LED power • USB 2.0 port • Line power input 100-240VAC/60W max. • banana jack for ESD wrist straps connection

PC system requirements •Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/2003/XP64 (XP and above recommended) •PC Pentium 4; 1.3 GHz (2GHz and above recommended) •256 MB of RAM (512MB and above recommended) •50 MB of free disk space (*1) •USB port 2.0 (2.0 high-speed recommended) Note (*1): Free disk space requirement depends also on used IC device size. For large devices the required free space on disk will be approximately 60MB + Device size

GENERAL • operating voltage AC 100-240V, max.1.2A, 50-60Hz • power consumption max. 60W active • dimensions 506x213x86 mm (19.9x8.4x3.4 inch) • weight (programmer) 4.8kg (10.58 lbs) • temperature 5°C ÷ 40°C (41°F ÷ 104°F) • humidity 20%..80%, non condensing

Package included Standard accessories • BeeHive4 programmer • USB connection cable PC-programmer • diagnostic POD for selftest of the programmer (1x) • anti-dust cover for ZIF socket (4x) • user manual • software CD • registration card • calibration test report • transport case Bonus pack: • ESD wrist strap with cord and banana plug • Vacuum pen • Gift (surprise)

Additional services • • • •

Keep Current. AlgOR free technical support (phone/fax/e-mail). free lifetime software update via Web site.

11

ELNEC s.r.o.

Setup The programmer package contains a CD with the control program, useful utilities and additional information. The permission to freely copy the content of the CD is granted in order to demonstrate how ELNEC's programmers work. We recommended install software before connecting programmer to PC to avoid unwanted complication during installation.

Software setup Insert delivered CD to your CD drive and install program starts automatically (if not, run setup.exe). Install program will guide you through the installation process and will do all the necessary steps before you can first run the control program. Step 1.

Click on “Software installation PROGRAMMERS” button. Step 2.

Select language and than click on “OK” button.

12

ELNEC s.r.o. Step 3.

Click on “Next” button Step 4.

For change default folder click on “Browse” button, select the destination folder. Then click on “Next” button

13

ELNEC s.r.o. Step 5.

For change default folder click on “Browse” button, select the destination folder. Then click on “Next” button Step 6.

Check if “Install Multiprogramming control support” is selected. Change default setting, if you want. Then click on “Next” button

14

ELNEC s.r.o. Step 7.

Check your setting and then click on “Install” button Step 8.

Installation process will start.

15

ELNEC s.r.o. Step 8.

Click “Finish” button to finish setup.

New versions of programmer software In order to exploit all the capabilities of programmer we recommend using the latest version of PG4UW. You may download the latest version of programmer software (file PG4UWARC.exe) from our Internet site www.elnec.com, part download. Copy PG4UWARC.exe to a temporary directory, disconnect BeeHive4 from PC and then launch it. Setup will start with Step 2 from previous chapter.

Hardware setup Step 1. Directly connect USB cable to type B USB port on programmer. Step 2. Directly connect USB cable to type A USB2.0 port on PC (high-speed recommended). Step 3. Connect connectors of power supply cable to appropriate connectors on programmer and wall plug. Step 4. Turn on programmer. At this time all 'work result' LEDs light up successive and then LEDs switch off.

16

ELNEC s.r.o. Step 5. Windows will start with “Found new hardware wizard”. For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 users only:

Select “No, not this time” and then click on “Next” button. For all:

Select “Install the software automatically” and then click on “Next” button.

17

ELNEC s.r.o. Step 6.

Click on “Continue Anyway” button. Step 7.

Click “Finish” button to finish setup. Step 8. “Found new hardware wizard” will launch for each programming module. Hardware setup will be continued with Step 5. Note: If a different USB port on the PC is used for the next connection of BeeHive4, “Found new hardware wizard” will launch and install new USB drivers.

18

ELNEC s.r.o.

Programming a device BeeHive4 can operate in two modes: Engineering mode Production mode

for make a project for mass production

Engineering mode This part of the software is focused to the quick and easy preparation of the project file for usage in the production mode control software. Each programming module is driven by an easy-to-use control program with pull-down menu, hot keys and on-line help. Selecting of device is performed by its class, by manufacturer or simply by typing a fragment of vendor name and/or part number. It is the same years-proven software, as is used for all other Elnec single-site programmers. Engineer can use all properties of this software and can make a project for mass production. Standard device-related commands (read, blank check, program, verify, erase) are boosted by some test functions (insertion test, connection check, signature-byte check), and some special functions (autoincrement, production mode - start immediately after insertion of chip into socket). All known data formats are supported. Automatic file format detection and conversion are doing during loading of file. There is possible to use Jam files (JEDEC standard JESD-71) and VME files The rich-featured auto-increment function enables one to assign individual serial numbers to each programmed device - or simply increments a serial number, or the function enables one to read serial numbers or any programmed device identification signatures from a file. The software also provides a many informations about programmed device. As a special, the drawing of all available packages is provided. The software provides also explanation of chip labeling (the meaning of prefixes and suffixes at the chips) for each supported chip.

19

ELNEC s.r.o.

Make a project 1.

Connect programmer to PC and outlet. Turn programmer on.

2. 3.

Run the control program: double click on Find BeeHive4 Site (programmer): or right click on panel Programmer

20

ELNEC s.r.o.

In combo box “Programmer” select BeeHive4, Site and then click on “OK” button. 4.

Select site.

Select desired BeeHive4 Site# and then click on “OK” button 5.

Select device: click on

6. 7.

Load data into buffer from file: click on Set Device operation options

21

ELNEC s.r.o.

8.

Set desired operations with a device and then click on “OK” button To customize device use menu

Set desired settings of a device and then click on “OK” button Note: Menu is depends on a device.

22

ELNEC s.r.o.

9.

Save project: click on project etc.

and select destination folder, write a description of

For more details see Help for PG4UW or “User manual for all ELNEC programmers”. Latest manual you may find it on www.elnec.com part download.

Production mode This part of the software is focused to the easy monitoring of high-volume production operations. Operator-friendly control software (Pg4uwMC) combines many powerful functions with ease of use. Graphic user interface provide overview of all important activities result without burden of operator with non-important details. There is used a project file to control the BeeHive4 multiprogramming system. Project file contains user data, chip programming setup information, chip configuration data, auto programming command sequence, etc. Therefore the operator error is minimized, because the project file is normally created and proofed by engineering and then given to the operator. The optional protected mode can be set for project file to avoid unwanted changes of the project file. Each chip may be programmed with different data such as serial number, configuration and calibration information.

23

ELNEC s.r.o.

Step by step instruction 1.

Connect programmer to PC and outlet. Turn programmer on.

2. 3.

Run the control program: double click on Search for connected programmer: or Programmer / Search for programmer.

In combo box “Multiprogramming system” select BeeHive4 and click on “Search” button. After end of successful search click on “Accept” button to finish Search of programmer. 4. 5.

or File / Load project Load project: click on Click on “Connect programmers” button to connect programming modules to Multiprogramming Control panel.

6.

. If Select action with device: click on desired action is selected, click on “Run” button. Desired action with devices on all sites will be start. On “Status window” you may see current states of action with devices on all sites. After end of action with device on “Status window” will be displayed “Please, insert a new device into socket” for appropriate site. After insertion of a new device into socket, desired action with device will be start automatically.

24

ELNEC s.r.o.

7. 8. 9.

For end of work with desired device: click on “Stop ALL” button. If you want continue with a new project go to step 4. For end of work with BeeHive4 click on “Disconnect programmers” button and then terminate a program: - or File / Exit.

Menu Programmer / Programmer Sites (or by right click on panel “Site #”) allows the user to show or to hide Site window, refind a programmer site, disconnect site or run selftest (Selftest plus) procedure for selected site. Menu Options / Settings allows the user to verify or to change some setting of control program.

25

ELNEC s.r.o. On upper part of window is a table with some site properties: allowed or prohibit site, Serial number, project file for site and programmed device. If you check “Site #”, then desired site is allowed. If uncheck, then site is disabled. If you check “Use Site #1 project for all Sites”, then project from Site #1 is the same for all sites. If uncheck, then all sites can have different project files. If you check “Automatic YES!”, then automatic start of action with device after insertion device to ZIF is allowed. Timer refresh rate defines how often the Pg4uwMC program will request status information displayed in Status window panel from running PG4UW programs. For more details see Help for Pg4uwMC software.

26

ELNEC s.r.o.

Troubleshooting and warranty Troubleshooting We really want you to enjoy our product. Nevertheless, problems can occur. In such cases please follow the instructions below. •

It might be your mistake in properly operating the programmer or its control program PG4UW. • Please read carefully all the enclosed documentation again. Probably you will find the needed answer right away. • Try to install programmer and PG4UW on another computer. If your system works normally on the other computer you might have a problem with the first one PC. Compare differences between both computers. • Ask your in-house guru (every office has one!). • Ask the person who already installed programmer.



If the problem persists, please call the local dealer, from whom you purchased the programmer, or call ELNEC direct. Most problems can be solved by phone, e-mail or fax. If you want to contact us by: • Mail/fax - Copy the "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form and fill it in following the instructions at the end of the form. Write everything down that you consider being relevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send the completed form by mail or fax to ELNEC (fax number in the control program, menu Help / About) or to your local dealer. If you send the form by fax please use black ink, a good pen and large letters! • E-mail - Use "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form on the CD or from our Internet site and fill it in following the instructions at the end of the form. Use standard ASCII editor. Write everything down that you consider being relevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send the completed form by e-mail to your local dealer or to ELNEC ((nospam version) elnec at elnec dot com). • Phone - Copy "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form and fill it in following the instructions at the end of the form. Write everything down that you consider being relevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send the completed form by mail or fax to ELNEC (fax number in the control program, menu Help / About) or to your local dealer. If you send the form by fax please use black ink, a good pen and large letters easily to read. Then call your local dealer or ELNEC's customer support center (phone number in the control program, menu Help / About). Please keep your manual, the programmer and the completed "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form (just faxed) available, so that you can respond quickly to our questions. If your programmer is diagnosed as defective, consult your local dealer or ELNEC about the pertinent repair center in your country. Please carefully include the following items in the package: • defective product



27

ELNEC s.r.o. • completed "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form • photocopy of a dated proof of purchase Without all these items we cannot admit your programmer to repair. Note: You may find the "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form at our Internet site (www.elnec.com), section 'Support'.

If you have an unsupported target device If you need to operate on a target device not supported by the control program for programmer, please do not despair and follow the next steps: •



Look in the device list of the latest version of the control program on our Internet site (section Download, file corresponded to your programmer). Your new target device might already be included in this version! If yes, download the file PG4UWARC.exe and install the new version of the control program. Contact ELNEC direct, filling up a "Device Problem Report" form following the instructions at the end of this form. We may need detailed data sheets of your target device and, if possible, samples. The samples will be returned to you after we include your target device in a new version of PG4UW.

Note: See also AlgOR service at our Internet site (www.elnec.com), section 'Support'

Warranty terms The manufacturer, ELNEC s.r.o. Presov, Slovakia, gives a guarantee on failure-free operating of the programmer and all its parts, materials and workmanship for three-year from the date of purchase. This warranty is limited to 25,000-cycles on DIL ZIF socket or 10,000-cycles on other ZIF sockets). If the product is diagnosed as defective, ELNEC s.r.o. or the authorized repair center will repair or replace defective parts at no charge. Parts used for replacement and/or whole programmer are warranted only for the reminder of the original warranty period. For repair within the warranty period, the customer must prove the date of purchase. This warranty terms are valid for customers, who purchase a programmer directly from Elnec company. The warranty conditions of Elnec sellers may differ depending on the target country law system or Elnec seller’s warranty policy. The warranty does not apply to products that are of wear and tear or mechanically damaged. Equally, the warranty does not apply to products opened and/or repaired and/or altered by personnel not authorized by ELNEC, or to products that have been misused, abused, accidentated or that were improperly installed.

28

ELNEC s.r.o. For unwarrantable repairs you will be billed according to the costs of replacement materials, service time and freight. ELNEC or its distributors will determine whether the defective product should be repaired or replaced and judge whether or not the warranty applies.

Manufacturer:

: ELNEC s. r. o., Post 5, P. O. Box 22, SK - 08005 Presov, Slovakia : +42151/77 34 328, 77 31 007, fax 77 32 797 www.elnec.com, (nospam version) elnec at elnec dot com

29

REPETTO CRISTALES SPY-CODE 2 Gracias por adquirir nuestro programador, por favor lea atte. las Instrucciones antes de comenzar a trabajar con el mismo. Vista del programador:

Detalle: El programador cuenta con: 1 led de encendido (rojo) POWER que se enciende cuando se conecta a La fuente de alimentación 220v 2 leds de memorias ( 24xx / 93xx / 93xxxs /) (rojos) 3 led de corto ( amarillo ) 4 led de estado LECTURA – ESCRITURA ( verde ) 5 Pulsador ( botón rojo ) seleccionador de memorias.

Vista trasera del programador:

Detalle: 1 Conector de fuente ( 12v) 2 Conector a PC ( salida Serial RS232 PUERTO COM ) 3 Salida a Pinza ( CONECTOR )

Programas necesarios para el Funcionamiento del Programador: IC-PROG Y PONY PROGRAM Ambos se encuentran al inicio del CD

Para instalar el PONY program, presione el primer botón ( Pony prog Beta ) y una vez instalado presione el segundo Boton ( Pony prog Spanish ) para cambiar el idioma al Español. El IC-prog es un programa que no necesita instalación, es ejecutable Del CD, o puede copiarlo a su disco rígido ( ICPROG.EXE ) En el botón de Carpetas Varias encontrara toda la información Correspondiente al uso del programador ( fotos / dumps / etc ) El ultimo botón contiene nuestra dirección de E-MAIL para Soporte Técnico.

FUNCIONAMIENTO: 1 Conecte la fuente ( 220v ) al programador y el LED de POWER Se encenderá. 2 Al mismo tiempo que el led POWER se encienda también se Encenderá el LED de la Primera memoria: 24xx Para pasar a otro tipo de memoria se debe presionar el pulsador (rojo) SELECT. 3 Una vez seleccionada la memoria se selecciona el tipo de memoria En el software y se procede a la lectura o escritura 4 Si la pinza estuviera mal colocada o mal seleccionada la luz de CORTO (amarilla) se encenderá, Verifique la conexión y selección De la eeprom. 5 Durante la Lectura / Escritura el led PROGRAMING ( verde ) Se encenderá mientras dure la misma.

SOFTWARE: IC-PROG – PONY Prog. SETUP

Este programador es compatible con cualquier software de programación que permita la utilización de programadores con conexión a puerto de serie. A continuación se detalla la configuración de los software de programación: IC-prog y Pony Program.

IC-PROG: Una vez abierto el programa, ir a Settings / ajustes, elegir Options / opciones y seleccionar Language para pasar al Idioma español. Luego seleccionar otra vez ajustes, hacer clic sobre: Tipo hardware F3 y aparecera la siguiente ventana:

Esta imagen corresponde a la configuración para WINDOWS XP, En caso de usar otra version de Windows la configuración puede variar. NOTA: El puerto COM puede variar según la configuración de cada PC

PONY-PROGRAM: Una vez instalado el programa principal:

Se debe seleccionar: CONFIGURACION y Configuración de INTERFAZ y se abrira la siguiente pantalla:

Esta imagen corresponde a la configuración para WINDOWS XP, En caso de usar otra version de Windows la configuración puede variar. NOTA: El puerto COM puede variar según la configuración de cada PC

Luego de setear el programa se debe calibrar el programa con el Programador, para realizar esto se debe igresar otra vez en: CONFIGURACION y presionar CALIBRACION. Una vez realizadas estas operaciones, el Programador esta listo para Trabajar. NOTA: la puesta a punto ( setup ) de los programas se realizan solo una vez.

TOPWIN Universal Programmer

User Manual

2004.10.

Content Brief Introduction ............................................................................................ 3 Chapter I

Software Installation ..................................................................... 4

1.1

Software Installation ...................................................................... 4

1.2

Hardware Connection .................................................................... 5

1.3

Software Specification................................................................... 6

1.4

Main Window ................................................................................ 7

Chapter II 2.1

2.2

Chapter III

File Operation .............................................................................. 9 File Menu ...................................................................................... 9 2.1.1

Create New File................................................................. 9

2.1.2

Loading ............................................................................. 9

2.1.3

the Saving Buffer Zone ................................................... 12

2.1.4

Print ................................................................................. 12

2.1.5

Set up Printer ................................................................... 13

Modify Menu:.............................................................................. 13 2.2.1

Fill Buffer ........................................................................ 13

2.2.2

Find: ................................................................................ 14

2.2.3

Replace Characters: ......................................................... 15

2.2.4

Repeat Last Find (F3):..................................................... 16

2.2.5

Extend or Shrink the File Buffering Zone: ...................... 16

Device Operation ..................................................................... 18

3.1

Conventional Procedures ............................................................. 18

3.2

Operate Menu .............................................................................. 18 3.2.1 Select Type ......................................................................... 18 -1-

3.2.2 Read-Out and Write-In Device ........................................... 20 Chapter IV SRAM and Universal Integrated Circuit Test ........................... 29 4.1

SRAM Test .................................................................................. 29

4.2

Integrated Circuit ......................................................................... 31

Chapter V System Settings ......................................................................... 32 5.1

5.2

Set Menu ..................................................................................... 32 5.1.1

System Status .................................................................. 32

5.1.2

Set Additional Information .............................................. 33

Window Menu ............................................................................. 37 5.2.1 Tile .................................................................................. 37 5.2.2

Overlap ............................................................................ 37

5.2.3

All Displays ..................................................................... 38

5.2.4

Display buffer Window ................................................... 38

Appendix: Hardware Characteristics .................................................... 38

-2-

Brief Introduction TopWin, a type of software developed for TOP series programmers, adapts to the TOP hardware products of a new generation. TopWin has abandoned its method of one type of software matching for one mode of TOP product by operating different mode of hardware units. TopWin supports automatic identification of hardware mode and function. Once TopWin connects to hardware unit successfully, the name of hardware unit will appear at the bottom of window. The current basic modes that TopWin supported include TOP853, TOP2004, TOP2005 and TOP2048. Product of new mode developed in the future will be supported by new version of TopWin software. TopWin supports multi-window operation, namely, it can connect multiple programmers on a computer to write device without any interference. Mode of programmer can be same or different. TopWin opens all devices in order of alignment. In theory, the number of connected devices is out of limitation. TopWin supports Windows98se/Me/2000/XP.

-3-

Chapter I 1.1

Software Installation

Software Installationof (WINDOWS98SE / ME / 2000 / XP)

1.

To disconnect programmer (Don’t connect with programmer).

2.

To operate Setup.exe in the CD and continues according to the prompt.

3.

Lastly, press confirmation to restart computer.

4.

After complete Windows start-up, use matching cord to connect with programmer. Computer will display the prompt of "find new facilities" and presses continue until completion.

5.

To operate “begin/program/TopWin.exe”, because it is the first installation, software has following prompt:

To press YES and wait for about five seconds, after blank screen vanish, following prompt will arise:

-4-

Press OK to exit. 6.

To operate TopWin again, green light on programmer turns on, lower right of software window shows equipment name topxxx, it shows everything is in normal status and can have normal operation. Please find the following:

1.2 1.

Hardware Connection USB interface should support hot swap, it can operate computer first and then reconnect programmer.

2.

To connect flat head of cord to USB interface of computer, square head connect to programmer socket.

(Both sides of cords are

different and must have separation.) When power indicator turns -5-

on “POWER” (red), it means power supply of machine has been put through. 3.

To operate on TopWin program, after two to ten seconds, programmer working indicator" READY" (Green) turns on, bottom of window shows the name of hardware unit topxxxx. It shows that machine had ready and can have normal operations.

4.

To open set up \ system status in the main menu and press “testing USB load current”, it show that from grade five to grade ten is normal, the higher the grade, the stronger the driving force. Electric current of grade five can write most of devices, some specific high-current devices need the electric current above grade seven. Most of the computers can reach to grade seven or more. If the computer is below grade five, it can connect cord (it should buy it additionally) or to circumscribe 5V / 2A regulated power supply (specific model have accessories, please check hardware specification).

1.3

Software Specification

z

TopWin don’t support old models of TOP851 / 852 / 2000 / 2003 / 48.

z

It is possible that D version XP of early age can not operate.

z

In normal conditions, it can see following information in “my computer/control panel/system/device manager”: -6-

After connect programmer

(Jungo/Top programmer/ WinDriver):

If no programmer find,show as:

1.4

Main Window After TOPWin start-up, main window of TOPWin will be showed on

the screen as follows: -7-

Software interface is composed by menu bar, toolbar, buffer zone, status bar and report group, therein five menus include all functions and options of TOPWin operation, set up common icon button in toolbar, it has the completely same effect to the operation which use in the menu. To use the methods of click can make command transfer more convenient and rapid. It should conduct explanation with the main thread of menu function for software application methods. Note: ● It can also operate on TOPWin software under the conditions of not -8-

connect with programmer. After get the prompt of “can not turn on equipment”, press “OK” to enter offline operation. ● For the operation which concerned with device read and write, it should operate in the corresponding dialog box after select the model.

Chapter II 2.1

File Operation

File Menu

"File" menu includes the file access and print operation, the format applies to binary system, hexadecimal and JECED. The file menu's functions are: 2.1.1

Create New File

:to create a new file.

2.1.2

Loading

The corresponding tool icon button is "Loading"; to open an existing file in the main window, and the file window will spring out after the performance:

-9-

Select the file name, and then select the file format in the format dialog box:

- 10 -

After confirming the file format, start and end address of buffer zone of the opening file, load the file data into the buffer zone, it will run as follow:

After the loading of file data into the buffer zone, if required to amend, move the mouse or keyboard to the relative byte and input the number directly. But the input number must be two hexadecimal numbers. If there is a large volume data, and the target data is not in the window, please use editing key "Page Up", "Page Down", "Home" and "End" to turn page, or you can input the address on the right of the "Start Address" at the bottom of the data window and press "Enter", the window will move to the "Address" immediately. - 11 -

PLD device introduces JECED formatted file of fuse diagram info with the extension of ".JED", after the data is loaded into the buffer zone, it will run as follows:

2.1.3

the Saving Buffer Zone

Its corresponding tool icon button is "Save", it is to save the content of the buffer zone. 2.1.4 Print Select the file mode of printing and print the file

- 12 -

2.1.5

Set up Printer

Specify the type of the printer and its ports

2.2

Modify Menu: The operation is to edit the data in the buffer zone.

2.2.1

Fill Buffer

The corresponding tool icon button is "Fill Buffer". The operation can fill in the buffer zone units with required data. Select "Change Buffer Size", the dialog box springs, input the start address, end address of the infill block, and the data to be filled in, and press "Yes".

- 13 -

2.2.2

Find:

The operation is to find the named data in the buffer zone, and only two hexadecimal characters (no case sensitive) can be input. After the performance, the standard finding dialog box springs as follows:

- 14 -

Press "find next" to find now. And continue to press "find next" to find again.

2.2.3

Replace Characters:

The operation is to replace the text characters. After the performance, springs out the dialog box of Replacing as follows:

● Input the text to be substituted in "Find what" frame, or paste from the clipboard. ● Input the text to replace in the "Replace With" frame. ● Press "find next" first to find the character string to be replaced; - 15 -

● Press "Replace" (p) button to perform the replacement. Note: To replace the next, you must press "find next" first, and then press "Replace" to perform replacement. 2.2.4

Repeat Last Find (F3):

For the text which has been found once before, you can press F3 to find the next position repeatedly. 2.2.5

Extend or Shrink the File Buffering Zone:

The size of the file buffering zone is typically similar with the file size. If you want to add data, you must extend the end address of the file buffering zone. Select "Change Buffer Size", the dialog box springs out, input the end address on the right of "End Address" and then presses "Yes".

- 16 -

Data filling, extending or shrinking the file buffering zone can also be performed in the buffer zone area by clicking the right button of the mouse. The menu popup is as follows:

- 17 -

Chapter III

3.1

Device Operation

Conventional Procedures Connect to TOPWin correctly; power indicator (red) turns on. Run “TOPWin.exe”, and working indicator (green) turns on. Select “File” in the main menu, and upload data to the file buffer. Insert the device into the socket and lock it up, and then be ready for

written-in and read-out operation of device.

3.2

Operate Menu

3.2.1 Select Type The corresponding device button is “Type”; pull down the pop-up Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type” after operation.

- 18 -

The procedures to select “Type” of device are to confirm the type of device in order of “Type->Manufacturer->Type”. ● Input key word in the right of “Search” in first line; if the key word is “51”, this step can be omitted. ● Select “Type of Device” in the “Type” menu, like EEPROM. ● Select a manufacturer from the list of “Manufacturer”, like “ATMEl”. ● Select a device type from the list of “Device”, like select “89c51”. If select a memory, press “Detect Manufacturer Code” to a get 2-byte code, the first byte of which denotes a manufacturer and the second one denotes a device type. - 19 -

And then, press “Confirm” to enter write-in and read-out operation.

3.2.2 Read-Out and Write-In Device The corresponding device button is “Read/Write”; Different device types have different read/write windows correspondingly. They are respectively described as follows: 1. Read-Write Combined Memory Take 29c010 for example, select the following item from the Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type” Type: EEPROM Manufacturer: ATMEL Device: AT29C020 Press “Confirm”, pop up combined memory read-write Window as follows:

- 20 -

● Write-in Device The write-in device is to write the data of the buffer into a device. The default values of File Start Address and Device Start Address are 0, which implies writing data into all the units of this device. While the length of the data can be up to six bits hexadecimal (HEX) numerals and the maximal address space is 8M. If necessary, user can follow required conditions to modify start address, so as to fulfil the intention to write in. The procedures to write in device are visually displayed via a progress bar. If confront with some units fail to write in, it will exit from - 21 -

the write-in procedures and display fault address, data in buffer and contents of device data. Cautions: Before write in device, special attention should be paid to not to mistake device types, otherwise, device or devices might be damaged, owing to the device types are totally different, the corresponding serving programming voltage might be different. After confirm all configurations are all right, insert the device to be programmed into the corresponding sockets, and then level lock-up spanner. ● Read-Out Device Read out all the data in the device and write them in the buffer, and then do page display in the data Window. The read-out procedures are visually displayed via progress bar. User can modify the read-out data and store them into a disk (the format of the file should be consistent with the built-in file format of the device). ● Erasing: Erase all contents of the device memory. After being erased, the device shows “FF”. Only EEP device can use this command, and EPROM needs to be erased with ultraviolet radiation. ● Blank Check: Before write in device, it is required to check whether there is a blank. Each byte of the Blank is “FF” (HEX).The check-out procedures are visually displayed via progress bar. When find out some non-blank unit, it will exit from the blank check-out procedures and display the address and - 22 -

data of the non-blank unit. This operation will check out all address space of EPROM, which is independent of the device start address or the data length. EPROM can be checked after being irradiated with uviol lamp, if still fail to pass, it is proved that the device was already damaged. ● Data Censor: This operation compares the data in the buffer with those in the device, which is visually displayed via progress bar. When confront with any unit fails to be censored, it will exit from the data censor procedures and visually display the fault unit address, the data in the buffer and the device data. For ensuring the written-in data in the device are correct, the “write-in device” operation should include the censor procedures. Therefore, no repetition of the same operation is required. ● Protection: Many EEPROM and FLASH ROM have protection functions. The device with protection function can only be read out, instead of being written into, unless invalidate the protection function. This operation is generally applied with completion of write-in operation. ● Protection Invalidation: It is in reverse with that of protection function. ● Read-Out Manufacturer: The former byte of the two-byte read-out code denotes the manufacturer, and the latter one denotes the type. ● Write-In Speed - 23 -

The programming speed of products by different manufacturers is totally different, and even if some products with different types are made by a same manufacturer, their programming speed might be different. It can generally be set into the standard speed. ● “Automated” Programming Operation This operation will automatically finish the device programming on the base of the selection in box of “Combined Operation”, which can advance the programming efficiency of device. 2. Read-Write MCU/MPU Take 89c51 for an example, select the following items from the Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type” Type: MCU/MPU Manufacturer: ATMEL Device: AT89c51 Press “Confirm”, pop up a MCU/MPU read-write Window as follows:

- 24 -

● The following operation procedures are as same as those of the combined read-write memory. Write-in Device, Read-out Device, Erasing, Check Blank, Data Censor, Manufacturer Read-Out, and Automated Operation. ● Encryption: The encryption method can adopt different method to encrypt the MCU/MPU. ● Check-Out Voltage The device working at lower voltage should select corresponding check-out voltage to verify written-in codes, so as to ensure the written-in codes are all correct. The check-out voltage won’t influence on the write-in voltage and the read-out voltage. ● Write-In Speed: There are only two options available. With manufacturer’s rapid - 25 -

reform of processing crafts, the delay time to write in device may be different. In generally, lower speed is better, although it may waste much time. 3. Read-Write Serial Port Memory Take 24c02 for example, select the following items from the Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type” Type: Serial Port Memory Manufacturer: Device: 24c02 Press “Confirm”, pop up serial port memory read-write Window as follows:

- 26 -

● Select Write-In Speed: The write-in speed of the serial port memory has much variation. It is not wrong to select the lowest one, while the write-in period might be longer. If proper speed is required, it is recommended to select different speed experiments to achieve. When the speed is too high, the adjacent data might encounter with repeated faults. In generally, it is relatively suitable to adopt 2-20mS. ● Read-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the “combined read-write memory”. ● Write-in Device These series of device are written in replacement mode, namely, these apparatuses are in no need of being erased. ● Comparable Data: It has the functions as same as those of the “combined read-write memory”. 4. Read-Write PLD Take ATF20V8B/L for example, select the following items from the Window of “Select Manufacturer/Type”. Type: Programmable Logical Drive Manufacturer: ATMEL Device: ATF20V8B/L Press “Confirm”, pop up a PLD read-write Window as follows: - 27 -

● Read-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the “combined read-write memory”. ● Write-in Device Before write the data of the file buffer into a device, it is required to get the file data be ready in advance. PLD device adopt the "fuse file” with extension of “.JED” in format of JECED, and the device should be blank, otherwise, it will fail to be written into. ● Check-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the “combined read-write memory”. ● Erasing Device: The original contents in the erasing device include and/or matrix fuse, structure control field, attribute field and so on. - 28 -

3.3

Automatically Detect Manufacturer and Type:

Chapter IV

SRAM and Universal Integrated Circuit Test

4.1 SRAM Test With the example of 628128, select in Select Manufacturer/Type box Category: SRAM Test Manufacturer: STAND Part Series: 628128 128K * 8 Press “Yes” button, popup SRAM Test Window as follows:

- 29 -

The menu is chiefly used to test the common static storage SRAM. Press Auto button, and the programmer tests each byte of memory to ensure the test is performed stably. Reading and writing operations of self-battery static memory are reserved in the operational functions, such as many series of products produced by DALLAS manufacturers, to meet some users' requirements.

- 30 -

4.2

Integrated Circuit

(The Contents are unsuitable for TOP853) It is available for testing the performance and logic function of thousands of types of products in 74, 45 and 30 series. Take 74HC245AP as example. Select in Select Manufacturer/Type box. Category: TTL/CMOS Test Press “Yes” button, popup Test Window as follows:

Select Series and Type of the tested device, and press testing button. In case that the device is normal, the speaker beeps a time, otherwise beeps three - 31 -

times.

Chapter V

5.1 5.1.1

System Settings

Set Menu System Status

The corresponding button is Link 1. Win version information Display the version information of programmer software 2. Programmer Type Display the type of current programmer. 3. Test USB load current Displaying the grades from 5 to 10 represents norm, the higher grade is, the stronger driving is. For example, in case of the grade lower than 5, connect keyboard power supply cable (additionally purchase), otherwise connect external 5V/2A regulator (Refer to the hardware specification in case that specific model is outfitted with accessories). 4. Serial Number (SN) - 32 -

Display the serial number of hardware of current programmer. To prevent from illegally modeling, each TOP programmer corresponds to an exclusive serial number so that the modeled product cannot access to software update services. 5.1.2 Set Additional Information TOPWin offers Additional Information. Additional Information refers to the subparagraph information separated from user code, and auto changes with writing, which can be used for software encryption or other uses. The Window showed as follows:

- 33 -

The Window includes three option items, with which the user can make settings in accordance with their own requirements. 1. Linear Increment Option: Input the address of additional information in Start Address edit box, and the address generally behind files must reserve an unspent space in the device. If the space of device is full of user files' code, the additional information cannot be written again. Select byte size of information in Byte Size edit box, the max is 8-byte - 34 -

(64-byte binary integer). Input an initial integer in Number Value edit box, the integer will change later. Select increment that is integer in Increment edit box. If there is a negative sign in front, the integer is Decrement. Select Allowable Linear Increment. 2. Date & Time Option:

Input the address of accurate date in Start Address edit box. - 35 -

Select Allowable Date & Time. Date & Time that needn't be input by user is auto created by computer. 3. Quantity Option: (The contents is unsuitable for TOP853)

Quantity Mode: if allowable, press Auto button a time while writing a device, and then it can auto detect whether the device is pinned securely. Once the device is properly installed, the writing process starts instantly. After fully running a time, it will display "OK, Please take away the completed device". Once take away the device, it display "Place a new - 36 -

device". After place a new device, the program will auto-cycle operation as testing all pins well connected. Avoid repeatedly pressing mouse, and be suitable for writing in large quantity. Note: Exit circulation in case of not inserting a new device within 5 minutes. Test the pins' connecting state: If allowable, test whether the pins of a new device are well connected in each individual operation, in case that any pin is poorly connected, report immediately, and stop operating. Speedily test overrun electric current: Even if the Option is forbidden, the result from testing overrun electric current is available, except for slowing down the speed and desensitizing the test.

5.2

Window Menu

5.2.1 Tile The opened file data are displayed in the entire data buffer. 5.2.2

Overlap

All opened files are displayed in overlap mode. - 37 -

5.2.3 All Displays Display all opened files, each Window non-overlapping. 5.2.4

Display buffer Window

Display the file data of buffer or the written data from a device.

Appendix: Hardware Characteristics TOP853 Universal Programmer TOP853, featured by small size, low power consumption and high reliability, is a universal mode of programmer designed for developing MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories. TOP853 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high unfailing performance without external power supply, so it is fit for mobile use of battery-powered notebook PC. Characteristics: z z

Support 5V device; Adopting USB interface power supply in stead of external power supply; - 38 -

z

Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a

transmission

rate of 12MHz/s; z

Adapting to battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;

z

Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against damage;

z

USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);

z

40-pin universal locking socket;

z

Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;

z

Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;

z

Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;

z

MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;

Performance and Specifications: 1.Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP) 2.Volume: 142 x 103 x 23 3.Weight: 250g 4.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA) 5.Locking bed: 40 pin home-made socket TOP853 Suite: - 39 -

1. A TOP853 host; 2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0); 3. A TOP853 Universal Programmer instruction book; 4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual; 5. A TopWin software CD attached. TOP2048 Programmer TOP2048 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of small size, low power consumption and high reliability. TOP2048 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high unfailing performance without external power supply, so it is fit for mobile use of battery-powered notebook PC. Characteristics: z z

Supporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices; Adopting USB interface power supply as well as 5V external power supply;

z

Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transmission rate of 12MHz/s;

z

Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;

z

Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against damage; - 40 -

z

USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);

z

All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;

z

48-pin imported universal locking socket adapting to all kinds of universal adaptors;

z

Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;

z

Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;

z

Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;

z

MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;

Performance and Specifications: 1.Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP) 2.Measured speed(PIII/800M,Windos98se,USB1.1): 28F320 write & check, 104 seconds 29LF320 write & check, 112 seconds P89c58 write & check, 5 seconds 3.Volume: 155 x 110 x 26 4.Weight: 350g 5.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA) - 41 -

6.Locking bed: 48-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable) TOP2048 Suite: 1. A TOP2048 host; 2. A 5V/2A regulated power supply (alternated); 3. A SDP-UNIV-44 universal adaptor (simple); 4. A PLCC32 adaptor (simple); 5. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0); 6. A TOP2048 Universal Programmer instruction book; 7. A TopWin Software Operation Manual; 8. A TopWin software CD attached. Typical Universal Adaptor Reference 1. SPD_UNIV-44 PLCC44 (*P44) 2. SPD_UNIV-44 SOP44 (*Q44) 3. PLCC32 4. SOP44 5. SDP-UNIV-48 TSOP48 6. SDP-UNIV-40 TSOP40 7. SDP-UNIV-i320 uBGA48 TOP2005 Programmer TOP2005 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of - 42 -

small size, low power consumption and high reliability. TOP2005 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high unfailing performance without external power source, so it is fit for outing use of battery-powered notebook PC. Characteristics:

z

suporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;

z Adopting USB interface power source in stead of external power source; z Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transfer rate of 12MHz/s; z Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC; z Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against damage; z USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade); z All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin; z 40-pin imported universal locking socket; z Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP; z Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption; z Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode; z MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer; Performance and Specifications: - 43 -

1.Software: TopWin(for windows98se/2000/ME/XP) 2.Volume: 142 x 103 x 23 3.Weight: 250g 4.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA) 5.Locking bed: 40-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable) TOP2005 Suite: 1. A TOP2005 host; 2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0); 3. A TOP2005 Universal Programmer instruction book; 4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual; 5. A TopWin software CD attached. TOP2004 Programmer TOP2004 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of small size, low power consumption and high reliability. TOP2004 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high - 44 -

unfailing performance without external power source, so it is fit for outing use of battery-powered notebook PC. Characteristics: z Supporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices; z Adopting USB interface power source in stead of external power source; z Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transfer rate of 12MHz/s; z Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC; z Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against damage; z USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade); z All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin; z 40 pin imported universal locking socket; z Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP; z Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption; z Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode; z MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer; Performance and Specifications: 1.Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)

- 45 -

2.Volume: 168 x 115 x 26 3.Weight: 280g 4.Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA) 5.Locking bed: 40-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable) TOP2004 Suite: 1. A TOP2004 host; 2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0); 3. A TOP2004 Universal Programmer instruction book; 4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual; 5. A TopWin software CD attached.

- 46 -

Willem Programmer revision 3.1 with EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter Two adapters were built to use the EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter : First an EZO DIP32 to 32 pin connector is installed in the Willem ZIP socket. Second, the TSOP40_A3 adapter is plugged on the DIP32 adapter.

Chip programmed :

Intel E28F004-B5T80 (COMPAQ M700 BIOS CHIP - corrupted)

EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter settings : JP7 set JP8 set (a second pin set has been soldered on the other side of the adapter so that jumpers can be placed on both JP7 and JP8 at the same time) The other 5 pines connectors is left OPEN (not used) Remarks : 1- Pay attention when soldering the TSOP Meritec adapter on the board. There is an unused track on the left side of TSOP40 pin1. Don't know why ?) 2- The Meritec TSOP socket is rather cheap BUT extremely difficult to solder on the PCB. The following method was used: Gently "wet" all TSOP soldering tracks with fine solder (0.6mm) and a fine soldering tip. Gently "wet" each MERITEC soldering pin. (if pines are shorted, you can easily remove the short with an ordinary pump.) Then apply flux on the soldering locations with a flux pen. Carefully align the Meritec socket and solder one pin on each side, i.e pin 1 and 40. Then, following the pre-wetted copper tracks from outside to the each pin, push the solder to each pin so that each pin is soldered correctly. The process has sometimes to be repeated, after putting additional flux. If there is a short between two pines, it can be removed ONLY with solder sucking wick ! (The pump nose is too tick) Thoroughly clean (alcohol) any excess flux, as it may lower dramatically the impedance between tracks. Pay attention not to let flux go up to the Meritec contacts) Measure each connection with an ohm-meter 3- If TSOP40 pines have slightly been bent during the de-soldering process : Cut a piece of business card paper (0.3mm tick) so that it can be placed under the TSOP40. Place the piece of business card under the TSOp a place both on the surface of a mirror. Gently push down on each pin in order to re-align them in the horizontal plan. Re-align also the pines in the axial plan with fine tweezers. 4- Put the TSOP to be programmed in the Meritec socket using tweezers in the correct direction. 5- Close and lock the Meritec socket. NEVER INSTALL THE TSOP40 ADAPTER LOADED WITH THE CHIP BEFORE LAUNCHING THE PROGRAM. ONLY THE POWER LED MUST BE ON, THEN INSTALL THE TSOP ADAPTERS ON THE ZIF32 ADAPTER.

DIP SWITCH settings on Willem board revision 3.1: The program (revision 98i) does not give the correct settings when EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter is used. Settings :

SWITCH 1 OFF SWITCH 2 ON SWITCH 3 ON SWITCH 4 OFF SWITCH 5 ON SWITCH 6 ON SWITCH 7 OFF SWITCH 8 OFF SWITCH 9 OFF SWITCH 10 ON SWITCH 11 ON SWITCH 12 OFF

OTHER JUMPERS on Willem board revision 3.1: NORMAL - 29X040 set to 29X040 A18-A19-A20-A21-A22 set to A18 27SF left OPEN Vpp 12.7, 14, 21V set to 12.7V (Vpp is tied to 5v on Ezo adapter via JP7) With these settings, the chip is correctly identified as 0x89 Intel and 0x78 28F004T as a Top Boot Block device. (for Bottom Boot Block Device it should read 0x79 and display E28F004B) To erase the chip select “Erase by Memory Map 8k/block” option in the program (0.98i). This selects the slow erase method which is the one that works OK with that chip.(The fast one doesn't work) The READ, ERASE or WRITE are very stable. I'll try next to program AM29LV017 and AM29LV081 chips with a 3.3V Adapter (Vcc on board and adapter) and the same TSOP combination. The Willem programmer is really great and flexible ! It helped to revive a quite expensive Compaq Armada M700 completely dead ! Thanks also to EZO for his great work on the simplified programmer and for his adapters.

Happy programming ! Yves ([email protected]) http://home.tiscali.be/chipit for smartcard programming ...

MaxLoader User’s Guide

1. INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 7 PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC USB INTERFACE PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC USB INTERFACE MULTI-SOCKETS PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC PARALLEL INTERFACE ABOUT THIS MANUAL GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7 8 8 8 9

2. GETTING STARTED / INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 10 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS HARDWARE INSTALLATION To Install the software from a CD drive TO START THE WINDOWS SOFTWARE TO INSTALL SOFTWARE AND CONNECT TO PC FOR USB PROGRAMMERS TO INSTALL THE SOFTWARE FOR PARALLEL PORT PROGRAMMERS To download the software from the www.eetools.com web site SELECT PRODUCT TROUBLE SHOOTING IN INSTALLATION

10 10 10 10 10 17 17 18 19

3. FAMILIES OF PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES ................................................................................ 20 ƒ NVM : NON VOLATILE MEMORY ƒ ROM : READ ONLY MEMORY ƒ OTP : ONE TIME PROGRAMMABLE ROM ƒ EPROM : ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE ROM ƒ EEPROM : ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE & PROGRAMMABLE ROM NVM HIERARCHY SERIAL FLASH EEPROM SERIAL EEPROM NON-TYPICAL DEVICES 8-BIT 1-MEGABITS 16-bit 1-Megabits ERASING AN EPROM

20 20 20 20 20 20 22 22 23 23 23 23 1

MaxLoader User’s Guide

PLD PLD Features MICROCONTROLLER ABOUT “DEVICE ID” AND “AUTO SELECT” ON EE TOOLS PROGRAMMERS

24 24 25 27

4. TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE GUIDE............................................................................. 29 SAFETY NOTE CONVENTIONS OTHER TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS CHOOSING A RIGHT ADAPTER Different Device Packages Different Programming Adapters

29 29 29 30 31

5. QUICK START EXAMPLES............................................................................................................... 32 PROGRAMMING AN EPROM WITH DATA DUPLICATING AN EPROM FROM A MASTER IC DEVICE

32 34

6. MAXLOADER OPERATIONS............................................................................................................ 35 BASIC MENU SCREEN INFORMATION Option Information (Additional Option Information For Non PLD Devices) System Information Counter File ƒ Binary Format ƒ Intel HEX Format ƒ Motorola S HEX Format ƒ TEKTRONIX HEX FORMAT ƒ ASCII HEX format ƒ JEDEC Standard ƒ POF file File / Load File / Reload 2

35 35 36 36 36 37 38 38 39 40 40 41 43 43 44

MaxLoader User’s Guide

File / Save File/ Load Project File/ Save Project Buffer Buffer / Edit Buffer Find Find Next Fill Buffer Fill random data Copy buffer Fill Buffer Print buffer Set editor to view mode Set editor to edit mode Set Editor to binary mode Set editor to 8 bit(byte) Hex Set editor to 16 bit(word) Hex Set editor to 32 bit(double word) Hex Set default editor mode Set default Reset Editor Swap nibble Swap byte Swap Word Swap double word Jedec editor Clear Close Buffer / Edit UES Device Select / Device select by history Select

44 45 45 45 45 45 46 46 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 57 57 57 57 58 59

3

MaxLoader User’s Guide

ƒ Select / E(E)PROM, FLASH ƒ Select / PLD ƒ Select / Microcontroller ƒ Select / PROM Select / Auto Select Select / Device information Select / Device information / Package details Test / RAM Test Device / Change Algorithm Device / Blank Check Device / Program Auto Menu Option Device / Read Device / Verify Device / Data Compare Device / Erase Device / Security Device / Encryption Device / Option 1 Device/Option /Customer ID ○ 2 Device/Option / Oscillator ○ 3 Device/Option / WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT) ○ 4 Device/Option / POWER-UP TIMER ○ 5 Device/Option / Memory Protect ○ 6 Device/Option / Data Protect ○ 7 Device/Option / Reset Polarity ○ 9 Device/Option / MCLR ○ 10 ○ Device/Option / Memory Parity 12 Device/Option / FLASH Write Enable ○ 13 Device/Option / Background DBG ○ 14 Device/Option / Brownout Voltage ○

4

60 60 60 60 61 61 62 62 64 65 66 70 70 71 71 71 71 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 75 75 76 76 76 76 76

MaxLoader User’s Guide

15 Option Item/Read Current Configuration Fuses ○ 16 Option Item/Program Current Configuration Fuses ○ 17 Device/Option/Read Status Byte or Boot Vector ○ 18 Device/Option/Program Status Byte or Boot Vector ○ 19 Device/Option/Initialize Device ○

Device / Auto Test ( These functions are only for TopMax, TopMaxII, UniMax ) Test / Vector Test Test / IC Test Config Config / Select Product Config / Config Option Config Option / Buffer Clear Before File Loading Config Option / Blank Check Before Programming Config Option / Verify After Reading Config Option / verify after programming Config Option / Byte order swapping Config Option / Device Insert Test Config Option / Device ID Check Config Option / Sound Config Option / Default Buffer Value Config Option / 32 Bit Checksum Config Option / Port (TopMax, ChipMax) Config Option / USB Option (USB programmer) USB option / Enable START button USB option / Good LED off on socket open USB option / Enable “START ALL” button Config Option / Gang Split Select Gang (useful only TopMax, ChipMax) Split Device Address File Load

76 76 77 77 77 77 78 78 79 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 84 84 85 85 85 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 90 92 93

5

MaxLoader User’s Guide

File Save Config Option / Auto Inc Config / Hardware test Config / Concurrent(gang) mode How to program (write) a same file into different sockets ? How to program(write) buffer ( blocks) data into different sockets ? Config / Language

93 93 94 94 98 101 104

7. TROUBLE SHOOTING & TECHNICAL SUPPORT .................................................................... 104 1. REGISTRATION 2. SOFTWARE UPDATES 3. TESTING THE HARDWARE 4. QUICK SELF-DIAGNOSTICS 5. CONTACTING CUSTOMER SUPPORT 6. SERVICE INFORMATION 7. LIMITED ONE-YEAR WARRANTY 8. USEFUL WEB SITE ADDRESSES/ PHONE NUMBERS 9. PROGRAMMING ADAPTER MANUFACTURERS 10. EPROM EMULATOR MANUFACTURERS

104 105 105 105 106 107 108 109 110 110

8. OTHER PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 110 Optional EPROM Emulator

110

9. ABOUT NAND FLASH MEMORY................................................................................................... 112 COMPARISON OF NOR AND NAND FLASH TECHNOLOGIES WHY NAND FLASH HOW TO PROGRAM NAND FLASH HOW TO READ NAND FLASH

112 112 113 113

10. GLOSSARY ....................................................................................................................................... 114

6

MaxLoader User’s Guide

1. INTRODUCTION This manual describes the operation of E.E. Tools’ programmers. TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax8G(4G) are software, Maxloader, driven device programmers. The information contained in this manual has been reviewed for accuracy, clarity, and completeness. Please report in writing any errors or suggestions to [email protected] E.E. Tools, Inc. 4620 Fortran Drive Suite 102 San Jose, CA 95134 USA. www.eetools.com Tel : (408)263-2221 Fax : (408)263-2230 E.E.Tools reserves the right to use and distribute any information supplied without obligation.

Programmer Models for PC USB Interface

7

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Programmer Models for PC USB Interface Multi-Sockets

Programmer Models for PC parallel Interface

About This Manual TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G(4G) User Guide explains how to install and run the programming software in your computer. ƒ Chapter 2 contains instructions for installing and running Maxloader. ƒ Chapter 3 describes the most popular programmable devices. ƒ Chapter 4 contains all terms and symbols used in the manual. ƒ Chapter 5 describes basic operating examples of programmers. 8

MaxLoader User’s Guide

ƒ Chapter 6 is organized by main operating commands and gives detailed instructions on each command. ƒ Chapter 7 provides troubleshooting information for identifying and solving problems with programmers. It provides a detailed guide for E.E.Tools’ technical support and return material procedures. ƒ Chapter 8 introduces a useful product, EPROM Emulator. ƒ Chapter 9 describes the recent information of NAND Flash ƒ Chapter 10 contains glossary about programmable devices and package types. This Manual assumes that you have a working knowledge of your personal computer and its operating conventions.

General Description TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G /4G are software driven device programmers that support a wide variety of programmable devices including: EPROM, EEPROM, Serial PROM, EPLD, PEEL, GAL, FPGA, and single chip Microcontroller. TopMax/ChipMax easily connects to the parallel printer port of any IBM PC, and can operate with a full spectrum of IBM compatibles: PC 386, 486, Pentium, PS/2, portable (laptop), and clone computers. TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax8G(4G) connects to the USB(2.0) port of any IBM PC, and can operate with a full spectrum of IBM compatibles. The great advantage of a programmer is their programming speed and superior software. All programmers are controlled via a host IBM PC computer. The operating software has a user-friendly interface that includes window pulldown menus and virtual memory management to deal with very large files.

9

MaxLoader User’s Guide

2. GETTING STARTED / INSTALLATION Installation Requirements Maxloader is designed to operate with any 386, 486, Pentium, PS/2, Portable (notebook), compatibles running WIN 95/98/ ME/NT/2000, and XP. The computer requires a CD-ROM drive, but a hard disk drive is also recommended.

Hardware Installation The following section details the procedure for accomplishing the hardware installation procedure. TopMax / / ChipMax easily connect to any parallel printer port in your computer and TopMaxII / ChipMax2/ UniMax / ProMax8G(4G) connects to USB 2.0 port in your PC.

To Install the software from a CD drive ƒ Place CD-ROM in the CD-ROM or DVD drive. ƒ Choose a programmer model from the list of files located on the menu screen. And then The SETUP program will launch the installation procedure.

To Start the windows software ƒ To run the windows software, select your product model shortcut in the Windows Start Menu / Programs list. ƒ From Configuration Menu, you can choose one of the TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G(4G) that you use.

To install software and connect to PC for USB programmers ƒ The software works with Windows OS 98, SE, Me, 2000, And XP. ƒ Follow the steps below for Windows. 1. Make sure a programmer is not connected to your computer, then turn on your computer. 2. Note: If you see New Hardware Wizard screen and disconnect your programmer. You cannot install programmer software that way.

10

MaxLoader User’s Guide

3. Insert the CD-ROM from factory (EE Tools) in your CD-ROM or DVD driver. 4. Wait until you see this screen then Click on Device Programmers and choose a programmer name. The executable file name for the installation is in the CDROM.

11

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Note: Customers who want to install the latest software may download the maxloader file from www.eetools.com

12

MaxLoader User’s Guide

5.

Set up maxloader software

6. Install Maxloader and the maxloader icon and USB driver (eetusb.inf and eetusb.sys files) will be generated in directory C:\program files\EE Tools\. ƒ Follow the steps below for installation for USB 2.0 driver. 7. Connect a USB cable between programmer and your computer and turn the power switch ON after connecting the power cord in the programmer. 13

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Note: In Windows2000, you need to choose “specific location” when the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears. The USB driver files are generated in directory C:\program files\EE Tools. Or you can find the USB driver files in the CD-ROM comes in the product package.

14

MaxLoader User’s Guide

8. Click on the Finish button on the Wizard screen and you can confirm the USB driver in Device Manager in your computer system.

15

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Note: For a computer that doesn’t installed USB 2.0 controller, you need to install USB 2.0 driver for the particular product vendor. 9. Execute Maxloader and choose Programmer model 10. Choose your programmer that is ready to be use in your computer.

16

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Note: Watch the model name in left-up corner screen and the TopMaxII won’t be ready if “DEMO mode” appears in the screen. Check the USB cable and turn on the AC switch in the back side of unit.

To install the Software for parallel port programmers There are three different addresses for the parallel port. When you select an address from LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, one of them should be valid without a communication error message. Turn the AC switch ON before running the Maxloader software. Make sure you connect the printer (IEEE) cable between TopMax/ChipMax and your available printer port and lock the shields in each side of the cable. Be sure that your programmer recognizes your computer’s parallel port address when you execute the Maxloader icon. (MEMO mode is indicated that your programmer has a “communication error”) 1. Connect print cable between PC and programmer. 2. Connect AC cord to programmer. 3. Turn on AC switch located on the back side of TopMax 4. Install programmer software that comes in a CD-R (or download the latest software (all-in-one) from www.eetools.com 5. After the Maxloader is installed, you choose a programmer name in the very first screen menu

To download the software from the www.eetools.com web site 1. Click on “Software download” button on left at www.eetools.com and download maxloader software. The file will be saved to your hard disk. The maxloader can be operated for All-in-one (all programmers-in-one software). 2. Once the download is complete, double-click on the file name to install the software.

17

MaxLoader User’s Guide

NOTE: For the latest software upgrade, remove the old maxloader in “Add/Remove Program” of “ Setting / Control Panel” in 2000/XP before installing a new Maxloader in your PC.

Select Product After Maxloader is installed, choose a programmer among TopMax, TopMax8G, ChipMax/ChipMax2, TopMaxII, UniMax, and ProMax8G(4G) hardware in the very first Maxloader screen menu. Or Click on Config / Select product Make sure to select the right model and turn the switch on. (TopMaxII, ProMax, TopMax) or connect the AC cord (UniMax, ChipMax/ChipMax2)

18

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Trouble Shooting In Installation A communication error may occur on the screen if the hardware / software are not correctly installed. Be sure that the following steps are checked: ƒ Make sure the USB driver is installed after Maxloader software is set up in PC. ƒ Make sure that the programmer hardware unit is connected to your PC printer port or USB port directly. A programmer for parallel port interface will not work with multiple port connectors. ƒ Be sure your printer cable is firmly connected to your computer and the programmer. Plug in the AC power cord to your programmer and turn on the switch in the back of the unit before clicking on the Maxloader icon. NOTE: The Maxloader detects the printer port address when you install the new software. When you see “Cannot find the programming module,” go to CONFIG/PORT and select all three parallel port addresses. If the same error message continues, contact technical support.

19

MaxLoader User’s Guide

3. FAMILIES OF PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES The devices that are supported on the E.E.Tools, Inc programmers are: ƒ NVM : Non Volatile Memory ƒ ROM : Read Only Memory ƒ OTP : One Time Programmable ROM ƒ EPROM : Erasable Programmable ROM ƒ EEPROM : Electrically Erasable & Programmable ROM

NVM Hierarchy

Flash Memory

Flash Memory Technologies

20

MaxLoader User’s Guide

A 0 0 1 1

B 0 1 0 1

C(and) 0 0 0 1

C(nand) 1 1 1 0

A 0 0 1 1

B 0 1 0 1

C(or) 0 1 1 1

C(nor) 1 0 0 0

Performance Comparison

* NAND Flash : High Wright Performance

21

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Serial Flash EEPROM The non-volatile Serial Flash Memory is widely used for code storage and user settings in cost-sensitive applications such as CD and DVD players, set-topboxes (STB), digital-TV and cameras, graphic cards, printers, PC motherboards and flat panel displays. These products typically run their operating code from fast Random Access Memory (RAM), after downloading the code from the low-cost Serial Flash Memory at power-up. Several semiconductor manufacturers produce this device family named as 25xxx.

Serial EEPROM These devices are electrically erasable, but they operate in a series rather than in parallel. ƒ Xilinx 17xx family From the Xilinx 17xx series, the RESET Polarity can be changed only on Xilinx 17xxD/L and 17128. On devices with EPROM portion already programmed or on new blank devices, RESET polarity is HIGH. The current status of the Reset pin polarity is determined and displayed on the screen after Reading the device. The polarity of the Reset pin can ONLY be changed from HIGH to LOW, but not vice versa. To change the polarity, click on the Option button and check the Reset bit box before programming your device. To make certain that the RESET Polarity has been changed, read the device again. On the other serial EEPROM devices (but NOT Xilinx 17xxD/L & 17128) the RESET polarity is always HIGH and it can not be changed to LOW.

22

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Non-Typical Devices 8-bit 1-Megabits There are four types of 1 Megabits EPROMS. One set has the A16 and OE lines swapped. However, this device will still program and verify like normal 1 Megabits. Once this device is placed into the circuit, it will appear as if it has not been programmed correctly. This is not due to the Maxloader software or the programmer, but the difference between these 1 Megabits. When selecting a 1 Megabit, it is important to determine which one you have. Here is a list of 1 Megabits and their equivalents: 27010 (normal pin-out -- program as GENERIC or INTEL 27010): Equivalents: INTEL 27010, HITACHI 27101, TOSHIBA 571000, NEC 271001, MITSUBISHI 27101, 27301 (non-standard pin-out -- program as HITACHI 27301's): Equivalents: HITACHI 27301, NEC 271000, MITSUBISHI 27100, TOSHIBA 571001, INTEL 27C100

16-bit 1-Megabits Any devices with the number 27210, 271024 and the MITSUBISHI 27102. 27011: The 27011 is a 28-pin 1-megabit device that is organized into 8 pages of 16k-bytes. NOTE: The 27512 is 4 pages of 16k-bytes.

Erasing an EPROM An EPROM has a quartz window located on the chip just above the die. Erasing an EPROM is done by exposing the EPROM to high-frequency ultraviolet(UV) light waves. Erasing an EPROM usually takes 15-20 minutes, but may be shorter or longer, depending on the device. If you wish to purchase an Eraser, call E.E. Tools at (408) 263-2221. When an EPROM is not being erased, the window may be covered with an opaque label. Sometimes (over a period of years) an EPROM will start to erase due to the rooms level of fluorescent light. Direct exposure to sunlight also has the same effect, but happens much more rapidly

23

MaxLoader User’s Guide

.

PLD A programmable logic device (PLD) consists of an array of logic gates and flipflops that can be programmed to implement an almost unlimited number of logic designs. These are programmable logic arrays that can be EEPROM based, EPROM based, fused link, anti-fuse, or Flash-based technology. They are programmable by the user to implement logic circuits in order to reduce part count and turnaround time. PLDs are programmed according to a fuse map, which is typically contained in a JEDEC file. NOTE: PLD compiler CUPL EE Tools offers PLD development tool for engineers who want to generate a JEDEC file for data of PLD devices. Four different tools are available in www.eetools.com

PLD Features Many different PLDs are available from the IC manufacturers. PLDs are fabricated using either bipolar or CMOS Processes. All PLDs are made up of combinations of AND gates, OR gates, inverters, and flip-flops. ƒ PAL: The PAL is a PLD with a fuse-programmable AND array. The PAL’s AND gates connect to OR gates in a fixed pattern.

24

MaxLoader User’s Guide

ƒ

PROM: For many years, the PROM was not classified as a PLD, even

though most of the smaller PROMs (i.e. 32 x 8 organization) were being used as logic elements. The larger PROMs were still applied in bipolar microprocessor designs to store microcode instructions. The PROM has an architecture similar to the PAL, except that the PROM’s AND array is fixed while it’s OR array is programmable. ƒ

FPLA: The field-programmable logic array (FPLA) consists of a

programmable AND array like the PAL, with a programmable OR array like the PROM. The FPLA is therefore a more general PLD because any product term may be connected to any output OR gate. Because the entire IC is programmable, the FPLA can implement some functions which a PAL or PROM may not be able to implement. ƒ

EPLD: Several manufacturers produce PLDs which can be erased and

reprogrammed like EPROMs. These ICs are called erasable programmable logic devices or EPLDs. Internally, they have the same programmable ANDOR-register structures of the PAL and FPLA.

Microcontroller These devices are CPU's with on-chip EPROM and RAM. They are typically 40 pins and are UV erasable. They have part numbers such as Intel's 8748,8749,8751,8752 etc. A micro-controller is generally a computer-on-a-chip with RAM, ROM, and I/O ports. Microcontrollers are usually used for specific purposes, such as keyboard decoders, printers, clocks, telephones, CD-players, or any other application that requires a small, on-board computer. Microcontrollers are used to take the place of in-circuit logic, as it can be less expensive and take less space. Also, since it is software driven, the device may be updated very easily. Micro-controllers have the ability to use internal as well as external RAM. Also, micro-controller data may be encrypted or otherwise

25

MaxLoader User’s Guide

secured to prevent copying of the data or program information. Microcontrollers also have their own instruction set, usually very similar to familiar Microprocessors (such as the 8080 or 8086). The INTEL MCS-51 family features up to 64k each of internal and external memory, 32 I/O lines, interrupts, timers, and bit-addressable RAM. Its instruction set contains 111 instructions. However, for specific purposes, limited versions of the 51 family are available. For instance, the Philips 87c751/87c752 families do not allow external RAM to be used, and have limited I/O channels, etc. However, these devices still allow for data/program encryption and security levels. They are also less expensive than the MCS-51 micro-controllers. See the help selection under MAIN-MENU COMMANDS for Encryption and Security-bit information. NOTE: Programming Microchip PIC family Microchip PIC series are different from other Microcontrollers in that they have an EPROM area as well as a Configuration Fuse. The Configuration Fuse in the PIC family is used to setup different Oscillator types, to set Memory Code Protection and Watchdog timer, and etc. To program this fuse: 1.

Program the EPROM portion of the device

2.

Click on Option

3.

Make any changes if necessary

4. Click on the Program Configuration Fuses button to program the fuse information that you want to program 5. Click on the Read Current Configuration Fuses button to read back the current status of the fuse 6.

Press the Close button NOTE: In order to obtain more information about programming the configuration fuse, please contact Microchip technology at www.microchip.com or refer to their data book.

26

MaxLoader User’s Guide

About “Device ID” and “Auto Select” on EE Tools programmers Most of the devices have their own manufacturer and device ID’s in each programmable devices such as E(E)PROM / Flash Memory, PLD, and MCU. However the old type of devices such as PAL, PROM, or 2816 does not come with an ID because the IC makers didn’t put its ID for the older chip types. (Auto Select) As you can see the “warning” in the Auto Select menu in Maxloader, we can only guarantee the “auto select” function for 32-pin or less device in E(E)PROM / Flash Memory. Since device library in programmer software has information for these standard device, users can utilize this feature as their purpose. However, all other devices such as PLD, Serial Memory, Microcontroller, and FPGA are not able to be recognized by programmer software automatically . We use this feature as optional device selection menu. Auto Select command allows you choose an unknown device through device IDs which were recorded in Maxloader library. Put a device up to 32-pin on the ZIF socket of programmer and click on “Auto Select” in Select Device menu. It will find out a correct device ID and choose a correct device for you.

(To Find a Device ID) After selecting a certain device from Select Device menu and plug-in a corresponding device in ZIF socket, you can see the ID(s) when you pressing “Shift” and “F1” keys in your keyboard.

27

MaxLoader User’s Guide

In the software menu, Chip(in socket) MFG(manufacturer) ID and DATA(in software) ID must be identical if your target device is valid .

28

MaxLoader User’s Guide

If it does not, check the socket with your device if you use NON-Standard (DIP) device or use test other devices in case the first device may be defective. This ID check must be passed before further operation on your device.

4. TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE GUIDE Safety Note Conventions ƒ

NOTE assists the user in performing a task. It makes the job more easily understood. ƒ CAUTION alerts the user that unexpected results or damages to a device may occur if an instruction is not followed.

Other terms and definitions are as follows ƒ Toolbar : Clicking on a toolbar button manipulates operations or commands for Maxloader programmer software. ƒ Bold/Italics : actions items/software functions, i.e. Edit Button, IC Test, or Change Algorithm. ƒ Device : The IC you are attempting to read, program, or verify. ƒ Buffer : The work area in your computer memory to execute Read, Save, Program, and Verify. The Buffer size may be from 64K to 32 Megabytes. NOTE: If the size of a device is bigger than the buffer size in your computer, Maxloader will use the hard disk space (swapping). For this reason, the Maxloader software can handle devices up to unlimited size of E(E)PROMs with your standard memory space ( a minimum of 512KB RAM memory is required).

Choosing a Right Adapter Most programming adapters are simple package converters. They allow TSOP, QFP, SOIC, or PLCC devices to plug into the same device’s DIP footprint. These adapters are available for memory, logic, and Microcontrollers. They can often be used with many devices from various manufacturers. For devices that cannot use a generic footprint we have offered adapters to work with specific programmers.

29

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Here is what you need to know to select an appropriate adapter. 1) A part number and manufacturer of your device. 2) A device package. (TSOP, PLCC, DIP, QFP, SOIC, etc.) (Refer to the following package drawings) 3) Pin numbers in your device. 4) In some cases you need to know your device package dimensions for SOIC, SSOP, and TSOP packages.

Different Device Packages DIP

PLCC

TSOP

SOJ

BGA

30

QFP

SOIC

PGA

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Different Programming Adapters

PLCC-TO-DIP

TSOP-TO-DIP

QFP-T

QFP-TO-DIP

BGA-TO-DIP

SOIC-TO-PLCC

DIP-TO-PLCC (for Emulator)

31

MaxLoader User’s Guide

5. QUICK START EXAMPLES If you are using a programmer for the first time, this section will help you to become familiar with the basic operating procedure. This section includes two examples of device programming with your programmer.

Programming an EPROM with data We selected an AMD 27C010 EPROM to show you how to program an EPROM. The 27C010 EPROM needs to be erased (blank) before this procedure begins. NOTE: EPROMs have a quartz window that can be erased by exposing the EPROMs to Ultra-Violet(UV) light. Erasing an EPROM usually takes 10-30 minutes. 1. Click on the Maxloader icon in your desk top menu after installing the Maxloader. 2. Check the optional configuration before programming begins. 3. Click on the Select button. There are two different ways to select the target device from the menu: 1) by choosing the device manufacturer type using the arrow keys or 2) by typing the manufacturer and the device names on NAME box. Maxloader will display the names of the devices that have the best match to your input. After selecting the device, the detailed device information box is provided below the select menu screen.

32

MaxLoader User’s Guide

4.Click on the Load to load a file from a floppy or hard disk into the buffer. Change your file directory by choosing a directory in Look in box. Choose a file name and type of the file. Make sure that the file type is selected; ”All Hex File” or “Binary file” is located in the File of type box.

33

MaxLoader User’s Guide

5. Insert the 27C010 device into the ZIF socket. After inserting the part, make sure that the socket handle is down (close) to secure the chip. See the illustration below:

6. Click on the highlighted cursor Blank Check. NOTE: If an EPROM is not erased completely, it will not pass the Blank Check. If an EPROM is damaged to begin with, it may not pass the blank check, although it has been erased for a long time in UV eraser. 7. Click on the Program. CAUTION: Do not touch the device while the BUSY green LED light is on (programming is in progress). After programming a device, the part is automatically verified. The Checksum is calculated and displayed in the OPTION info. In order to verify your work, read the programmed part again. If this Checksum value matches to that of the programming checksum, then the 27C010 is programmed successfully.

Duplicating an EPROM from a master IC device The following is an instruction on duplicating a programmed device. In order to do so a source device and an erased (blank) target device are necessary. Source Device: Programmed AMD 27C256 34

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Target Device: Erased or blank INTEL 27C256 1. Make sure the Maxloader is displayed without any communication error (refer to programming section ). 2. Place the AMD 27C256 device into the ZIF socket. 3. Select the manufacturer and part names from the Select menu. 4. Click on the Read button. In order to make sure the device is read properly, Click on the Verify button. 5. Remove the current chip from the socket and replace it with the erased or blank Intel 27C256 device. Select the appropriate device from Select menu on screen. NOTE: You do not need to change the device information if you use the exact same chip as the source device. 6. Click on the Blank button. 7. Click on the Program button. The part will be programmed and verified automatically. If no error messages appear during the Programming or Verification process, your duplicating work is done successfully. You have a duplicated Intel 27C256 part from AMD 27C256 chip.

6. MAXLOADER OPERATIONS This section describes the operation of the software. The Main standard system-menu is divided into four display areas: Main operation menu screen, Option Information, System information, and counter.

Basic Menu Screen Information Option Information • Gang Size : Current socket size when Maxloader is used • Split : Current world format for split programming • Enc Mode : Enable or Disable Encryption mode for Microcontrollers • Base Port : Current parallel port address • Check-Sum : Check-Sum number of the data in current buffer 35

MaxLoader User’s Guide

• • •

H/W Rev S/W Rev Serial No

: Hardware revision number for your programmer : Current Maxloader software revision number : Serial number of Maxloader hardware

(Additional Option Information For Non PLD Devices) The following information presents programming information of the selected device. • Algorithm : Programming Algorithm • Vccp : Main Power Supply Voltage • Vpp : Programming Power Supply Voltage • Tpwp : Programming Pulse Width

System Information • •

Device Name Device Size



Free Disk

• • •

Adapter Pins File

: The current device number with manufacturer name : The size of device in HEX value (Ending Address –Starting Address + 1) : Check the free disk space for a big size E(E)PROM programming. : Optional Adapter Name for Non-standard devices : Number of device pin : Current working directory path and file name after loading a file

Counter •

• •

36

Devices/HR

: Displays the estimated number of devices that can be programmed per hour. This feature can only be used when choosing the Program or Auto selection under the Device button. Success : This number indicates the device programmed successfully. Failure : This number indicates the number of device programming errors that occur during a programming cycle. These could be either Blank Checking, Programming, or

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Verification error. Count : This number indicates all devices executed successfully and unsuccessfully. NOTE: This feature is useful for repeat programming on the same device. You can make an estimate time to perform the programming job and see the successful and failed devices after finishing the Program or Auto Repeat programming routine.



NOTE: The feature allows users to program a certain area that might contain a serial number in the memory device with serialized number by a certain value. Start End

: Start address of memory that contains serialized data : End address of memory

Inc Value : This value will be added to the previous data value User must click on Auto Increment to program a memory with data increased by one to the previous data.

File Maxloader uses three different file types: BINARY, ALL HEX, and . POF. In the file types box, a file type can be selected and loaded to the buffer or saved onto a disk. The default file type is the Binary file. The All HEX files can be chosen by maneuvering the arrow button. All HEX files include INTEL HEX (MCS-80/86/386, MOTOROLA S (1-9), Tektronix HEX and ASCII HEX. OPF 37

MaxLoader User’s Guide

(Programmer Object File) is a binary file generated by Altera assembler (Quartus and MAX+PLUS II). This file should be loaded for Altera MAX or EPC family devices only.

ƒ

Binary Format

Binary format does not specify the address or checksum of the file. The file contains the actual binary data. An example of this format is a DOS executable file with an .EXE or .COM extension. Binary format is generated for programmable memory devices. It is recommended to save your EPROM data as binary format in order to load the file as a standard file format later.

ƒ

Intel HEX Format

Intel HEX format files are text files that include the file information in hexadecimal. 1 : A record mark 2–3 Byte Record length in 2 digit HEX, Max 20 (64 in ASCII) 4–7 Address 4 digit HEX Field. Most significant byte first 8–9 Byte 2 digit field record type : 01 End of file 02 Extended address 10 – N Data Data field in HEX digits N+1 – N+2 Check-Sum Two digit HEX Check-Sum character computed by two’s complementing the sum of previous bytes except the ‘:’ INTEL HEX FILE EXAMPLE :110000000444154414D414E2053332053455249414C73 :00000001FF The extended address record specifies the index address where data will be loaded into. The Extended Address will continue to offset data record address until a new Extended Address record is specified.

38

MaxLoader User’s Guide

:02 0000 02 4A29 02 Check Sum Index address Record type Address Record Length

• •

The Address field is blank because this record is not data. The record length is '02' for index address (2 Bytes).

NOTE: If the address for the data record is '2B56', the actual address will be 4A290 + 2B56 or 4CDE6(HEX).

ƒ

Motorola S HEX Format

The Motorola S format file is an ASCII-HEX file. Position (Byte) Character Remarks 1 S Letter S indicates start of record 2 0, 1, 2, 3, or 9 A single character indicates the type of record. 9: End-of-file 3: 32-bit address data record 2: 24-bit address data record 1: 16-bit address data record 0: Header 3-4 Bytes Byte COUNT in HEX (multiply by two for number of characters). This count includes the address, data, and Checksum field. 5-X Bytes Memory Address for the current record. X will be: 8 : 16-bit addressing for files less than 64K. 39

MaxLoader User’s Guide

10: 24-bit addressing for files greater than 64K. 12: 32-bit addressing for files greater than 64K in length. X+1 - N Bytes HEX Data (two per byte) N+1 – N+2 Check-Sum Two digit HEX Check-Sum character calculated by one’s complement of DATA, ADDRESS and COUNT. Motorola File Example S325200000002F0000EA060000EA0B0000EA100000EA160000EA0000A0E11B0000EA210000 EA31

The file offset address is “20000000 ,” so you should put this value in the “file offset” of “File Load” config option / address menu.

ƒ

TEKTRONIX HEX FORMAT

The Tektronix HEX format contains ASCII records, expressing bytes ASCII pairs. Position Character Remarks 1 / Slash character for start of line 2-5 2Bytes Address. MSB first load 6-7 Byte Number of data bytes (not checksums) 8-9 Byte Check-Sum of ADDRESS and COUNT by character in HEX (not by byte) 10 - N Data Data bytes as ASCII pairs N+1 - N+2 Byte Check-Sum of Data by character (not as bytes) Tek Hex Example /00001102444154414D414E2053332053455249414C8F /01000001

ƒ

ASCII HEX format This selection generates an ASCII coded HEX format for either 4-bit or 8-bit PROMs. Each record contains a four-digit HEX address (16-bit) followed by 16 data elements. A 16-bit checksum is at the end of the file.

40

MaxLoader User’s Guide

When this format is selected, the device base address must be specified. This address represents the lowest address in the device. The file created contains an entry for each location in this device. ASCII HEX format can be created for programmable memory devices only.

ƒ

JEDEC Standard

JEDEC (Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council) files are the standard method for describing PLD fuse patterns and test vectors. JEDEC files contain fuse data, test vectors, part numbers, and checksums. The checksum of the file allows you to verify that a given file is intact and has not been unintentionally modified. JEDEC files normally use the extension (last 3 letters) “.JED.” For more information on the JEDEC standard, contact: Global Engineering Documents Inc. at (800) 854-7179 Electronic Industries Association at (202) 457-4900. Following is an example of a JEDEC file: File for PLD 15S8 Created on 11-SEP-96 5:08PM 2754 memory decode 345-432-123 Seung Park PK Logic corp. QP20* QF448* QV8* F0*X0* L0000111110111111111111111111111* L0028101111111111111111111111111* L0056111011111111111111111111111* L0112010110110111101111111111111* L0224011110111011101111111111111* L0336010101110111011111111111111* V0001000000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN* V0002010000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN* V0003100000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN* V0004110000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN* V0005111000XXXNXXXHLHHXXN* V0006111010XXXNXXXHLHHXXN* 41

MaxLoader User’s Guide

V0007111100XXXNXXXHHLHXXN* V0008111110XXXNXXXLHHLXXN* C124E*8646 STX The fuse map begins with an ASCII STX character (02 HEX) Design Specification This item is user specific. While no format rules apply, certain information, such as user’s name, company, design date, part designation, revision and device part number, should be entered. This field is illustrated by an asterisk (*). QP Specifies the number of pins in the devices. QF Specifies the number of JEDEC fuses in the devices. L The fuse list fields contain the state of all fuse links in the devices. The starting fuse number follows the L specifying the field type. The fuse list that follows contains a zero (0) for each intact link and a one (1) for each blown link. An L field is generated for each product term in the device. C The checksum field contains the 16-bit sum of the link stated in the 8-bit words. ETX The fuse map ends with an ASCII ETX character (03 HEX). Sum Check A 16-bit sum of the ASCII values of the characters from STX to ETX inclusive. The sum check follows the ETX. NOTE: LOGIC Compilers For PLD Devices: Software is available to help the engineer develop designs using PLDs. Software tools called logic assemblers or compilers translate a design file written in high-level language into a fuse pattern stored in a JEDEC file. JEDEC files are produced by almost all PLD development software’s and are accepted by the Maxloader programmer. There are many commercial software packages available to help you design using PLDs.

42

MaxLoader User’s Guide

ƒ

POF file

The programming object file (.pof) for an EPM7128A or EPM7256A device can be programmed into the EPM7128AE or EPM7256AE device, respectively, using the MAX+PLUS® II software version 9.6 and later or with 3rd party programming software from EE Tools programmers. For further question on POF file, contact http://www.altera.com/support/sptindex.html.

File / Load Data can be loaded into the memory from a device or by opening a data file. Load fills your buffer memory with the data from storage for viewing or editing. This command loads the data from the selected file storage into the memory buffer. In order to the use “All HEX File” selection, the HEX file must be one of the file formats supported by the Maxloader(TopMax/Chip Max), such as Intel HEX(MCS-80/86/386, MOTOROLA S(1-9), Tektronix HEX and ASCII HEX.

The default selection on File Load menu is in Binary Format. To select any of the HEX files mentioned above, choose “All HEX File” by pressing ⇓ button. When you have selected the desired file, press the OPEN button to load the file into the data buffer. If you are programming a PLD, you will want to load a 43

MaxLoader User’s Guide

JEDEC file. The procedure is identical to loading a data file, except that the files in the current directory will have the JED extension. If your selected device is an Altera MAX family, the file you should load is a POF extension. The Maxloader uses a RAM buffer to hold data. After loading a file into the buffer, you can edit the buffer data. If you load a JEDEC file, you may use (the vector pattern edit) command to view or edit the fuse map and (test/vectors) for any test vectors that may have been in the JEDEC file.

File / Reload

Data can be reloaded into the memory from the file directories that contains previously loaded files. Reload remembers your file location and type (Binary or All Hex) that has been loaded into the buffer.

File / Save Save the current data in your memory buffer to a disk storage by using one of the current supported file formats. Before saving a file, check the buffer and the file address ranges. The contents of the buffer through the specified range will be written into the new file, completely erasing any existing file with the same name. Before saving to a disk, make sure that no file with the same name exists.

44

MaxLoader User’s Guide

File/ Load Project A project file that saved by SAVE PROJECT menu is loaded. The project files use the extension (last 3 letters) “.prj.”

File/ Save Project This feature allows you to create a job description such as “engineer name” and other useful information for records. It is very useful for future use when you set up all possible environments such as selecting a device, loading a file, and setting other configurations for programming jobs. A job description can be saved as a file name and the same project environment will be ready once you load the same project name. File Name: A file name can be entered with the 3 letter extension “.prj.” Author: An engineer’s name [whom creates this project]. Description: A job explanation that you memorize for your future usage. A device number, File name, and checksum number can be entered in the note pad. Other programming menu descriptions, such as configurations can be described.

Buffer Buffer / Edit Buffer This command allows the user to examine and modify the contents of the memory buffer. This section applies to a non-JEDEC file (PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, and Microcontroller) or to a memory chip. If a PLD is being loaded, see the (vector pattern edit) section. The data is presented in HEX and ASCII formats.

Find This feature allows you to search the data (ASCII and HEX) in the current

45

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Asc HEX Direction UP

: The data looking for ASCII value. : The data looking for HEX value. : The data searching from previous address than the current location. Direction DOWN: The data searching from higher address than the current location. If you would like to find more data, click on the Find Next button.

Find Next Press the Find Next button to locate the rest of the data that you entered in the FIND box. The error “Search Pattern not Found” will be accursed when you press this button without entering data in the FIND text box.

Fill Buffer You can enter a certain character(data) in a certain buffer location. Buffer Start: Starting address for the data to be filled in buffer. Buffer End: Ending address for the data to be filled in buffer. 46

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Fill Data: Two digits of HEX value to be filled between Start and End buffer.

Fill random data Once you click this button, a random data stream will be filled in the entire. This will be useful before programming a device with full buffer data.

47

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Copy buffer Copy certain data between 2 address to other location in the same buffer.

Fill Buffer Enter certain data between 2 different buffer locations.

48

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Print buffer The current buffer data can be printer in different formats. Also, you can review buffer data with an editor in an utility software..

Set editor to view mode This mode allows you not to modify data in the buffer.

49

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Set editor to edit mode This mode allows you to modify data in the buffer.

Set Editor to binary mode The data in current buffer will be changed as binary mode.

50

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Set editor to 8 bit(byte) Hex The data in current buffer will be changed as 8-bit hex value.

Set editor to 16 bit(word) Hex The data in current buffer will be changed as 16-bit hex value.

51

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Set editor to 32 bit(double word) Hex The data in current buffer will be changed as 32-bit mode.

Set default editor mode Make the current buffer mode as same data size as the selected device in the current operation. It could be 8 or 16-bit depends on the device selection.

52

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Set default Reset Editor The cursor mode will be the first data in address 0..

Swap nibble Swap each character(nibble) in 8-bit(1 byte) block.

53

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Swap byte Swap each 8-bit(1-byte) data in each 16-bit(4-byte) block.

Swap Word Swap each 16-bit(2-byte) data in each 32-bit(4-byte) block.

54

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Swap double word Swap each 32-bit(4-byte) data in each 64-bit(8-byte) block.

Jedec editor This buffer mode allows you to retrieve and modify data for PLD devices.

55

MaxLoader User’s Guide

The data can be displayed in two different mode(unused-bit “0” or “X”, usedbit ”1”or “ –“.)

In the Jedec editor mode, you can still use all features in Buffer Edit Mode.

56

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Clear Pressing this button allows you to fill the buffer with the data located in “Default Buffer Value” in Config Option Menu.

Close Press to exit the HEX Editor.

Buffer / Edit UES The UES Edit command creates or changes the User's Electronic Signature (UES) array in GAL device. Each GAL device contains an electronic signature word consisting of 64 bits of reprogrammable memory. The electronic signature word can be programmed to contain any identification information desired by the user. Some uses include pattern identification labels, version numbers, dates, inventory control information, etc. These features give the user the ability to view and edit the UES data before programming a GAL device. When the UES edit command is invoked, an editing data window appears. If the data fields are empty, you may create a new UES. You can enter the UES up to eight characters in the HEX or ASCII data area. If you see any data from the current UES window, it means the UES has been created and that you can modify the data for a different reason. The UES data is not secured when you execute the Function / Security command.

Device This section presents the main operation menu for the target device that is mounted on the ZIF socket. In order to process the following commands, make sure that the device is correctly inserted into the ZIF socket and the latch is down. NOTE: The Device Information display area presents the device information of the selected device.

57

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Select / Device select by history Pressing this button allows you to review all devices that have selected before. You don’t have to select the same data again and just select from this menu.

58

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Select

During operation, the first step is usually to select a device. This Select command enables the user to define the manufacturer and the type of the device that will be used. After you select a device, you can insert a device into the programmer’s device socket and conduct various device operations such as programming and verifying device data or reading data from the device. The Select command contains both manual and automatic methods for selecting a device. If your device is not identified by the Auto Device Select menu, you can select the device list displayed in the Manufacturer & Device list. Scroll through the manufacturers and device numbers until you find the manufacturer and device you are looking for. You can use wildcards to help you “zoom” on the device you are looking for. NOTE: PAL Device Logic Symbols: The logic symbols for each of the individual PAL device gives a concise functional description of the PAL device

59

MaxLoader User’s Guide

logic function. This symbol makes a convenient reference when selecting the PAL device that best fits a specific application

ƒ

Select / E(E)PROM, FLASH

All EPROMs (27xxx), EEPROMs (28Cxxx, 29Cxxx), Serial E(E)PROMs (17xxx, 24xxx, 32xxx, 33xxx, 35xxx, 59xxx), and Flash EPROM (28Fxxx, 29Fxxx, 29LVxxx, 29BVxxx, 29Wxxx, 49Fxxx) of 24/28/32/40/42 and up to 48 pins (1 Mbit, 2Mbit, 4Mbit, 8Mbit,16Mbit, 32Mbit, and up).

ƒ

Select / PLD

EPLD, EEPLD, FPL, PEEL, GAL, MAX, MACH, PLS, PLD, PLC, PLUS, EPM, ATFxxx, ATVxxxx, EPxxx, EPCxxx, 5Cxxx, 85Cxxx.

ƒ

Select / Microcontroller

Intel 87xx, Phillips 87C75x, SGS-Thomson ST62xx, Atmel AT89Cxx, 89Sxx, 89LVxx, Microchip PIC12/16/17, Motorola MC60705xx, MC68HC711xx/705xx/908xx; Zilog Z86Exx; NEC 8749H.

ƒ

Select / PROM

AMD 27Sxx, Cypress CY7Cxxx, Fujitsu MB71xx, Fairchild 63Sxx, NS 74Sxxx, Phillips 82Sxxx, WSI 57Cxx.

60

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Select / Auto Select Identify the device that is mounted on the ZIF socket. This feature can only be applied to Memory and some Microcontroller devices. Clicking the Auto Select button will enable the programmer to identify the ID on the device and will select the matching device in the library automatically. NOTE: If you have a “Device not found" message, select the device manually. If you have old devices or defective devices, TopMax will not be able to recognize the ID code from your device.

Select / Device information

Pressing this button allows you to review the target device information before selecting a device.

61

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Select / Device information / Package details Pressing this button allows you to review package information for a target device before selecting a device.

Test / RAM Test

62

MaxLoader User’s Guide

TopMax, TopMaxII provide an additional memory test function. This operation tests static and dynamic RAM memory chips. The following memories are tested: DRAM types tested - 16K*4, 64K*1, 64K*4, 256K*1, 256K*4, 1M*1 SRAM type tested - 2K*8, 8K*8, 32K*8, 128K*8 After inserting a memory device into the ZIF socket, select the memory type from the device select “GENERIC RAM” selection screen and click on the RAM test button.in the test menu. The program will test each address of the memory. A "Defective memory" message will be displayed with a current address if the memory has a defective bit. "Good memory" will appear when the test has passed successfully.

63

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Device / Change Algorithm

Users are provided with an option of changing the programming parameters of most devices. Once you select the “Change Algorithm” option under the DEVICE menu, the user will be presented with a list of device specific programming parameters, such as Vccp, Vpp, Read Vcc, Verify Vcc Low, Verify Vcc High, Pulse Width, Over Pulse Width, Over Pulse Mul, and Retry number. Each of these parameters can be selected and edited individually by changing the existing numbers in the parameter box and pressing the close button. The user will then be prompted to enter the new value for that parameter. CAUTION: Please note that before deciding to modify any programming parameter, the user must consult the manufacturer programming specification for that device. E.E. Tools will not be responsible for any damages caused by any unauthorized modified programming parameters. Any changes in programming parameters are temporary and the original parameter’s value will be restored once the operation on that device is complete. However, the user can store the modified programming parameter for a particular device by using Macro command.

64

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Device / Blank Check The Blank Check function is used to verify whether or not a device is in an erased or unprogrammed state. All EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) devices should be checked before programming. EEPROM (Electrical Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) based parts do not need this command because EEPROM’s are erased automatically before programming. PLD based parts are checked by verifying all of the fuses that are intact. Any erased PLD’s should pass this test. NOTE: Erasing EPROMs. In order to clear data in an EPROM, the chip should be exposed to a short wave UV (Ultra violet) light. Most erasers require between 5 and 30 minutes erasing an EPROM. Some types of chips take longer to erase than others. An EPROM based part (a PLD or Microcontroller) with a security bit feature is designed so that the security address is typically the last bit to be erased. If the window of a chip is not clear, try cleaning the window with alcohol or a solvent. Erase chips if the chips are exposed to sunlight and fluorescent light for months or years; your chips can be erased. You should cover the window of the programmed chips with an opaque label to make the data permanent. Some EPROM based parts can't be erased because they do not have a window. These chips are called one time programmable (OTP) EPROMs. An EPROM has a quartz window located on the chip just above the die. An EPROM is erased by exposing it to high-frequency ultra-violet light waves. Erasing an EPROM usually takes from 15-20 minutes, but may be shorter or longer, depending on the device. Many manufacturers make EPROM erasers. If you wish to purchase an eraser, call E.E.TOOLS at 408-263-2221, [email protected] When an EPROM is not being erased, the window may be covered with an opaque label. Sometimes (over a period of years) an EPROM

65

MaxLoader User’s Guide

will start to erase due to the level fluorescent light in the room. Direct exposure to sunlight also has this effect and happens much more rapidly and commonly. NOTE: In order to decide if the device is blank, the user should read the target device. If the buffer is filled with all FFs or 00s, the device is most likely in an erased or unprogrammed state; otherwise, the device is not erased. CAUTION: Some devices such as Philips P98C52 can pass the BLANK CHECK routine after they are secured even though they are not blank.

Device / Program Program command will enable you to place new data from the memory buffer into the target device. The BUSY GREEN led will be blinking during programming. Make sure the device is correctly inserted into the ZIF socket and the latch is down. Then check the buffer device address range before you start. The values will default to the size of the device. NOTE: The window of windowed devices must be covered with an opaque label during operation at all times. NOTE: For all DEVICE/FUNCTION operations, the ERROR YELLOW LED, located at the bottom of the ZIF socket is used to indicate the status of the complete operation. It will turn on if an error has occurred; otherwise it will remain off.

Memory device ƒ The target device must be blank checked unless the part is electrically erasable. Although most of EEPROMs and Flash Memory devices have the ERASE function in the menu, some EEPROMs such as AT28CXXX or AT29CXXX

66

MaxLoader User’s Guide

don’t have the ERASE function. Note that EEPROMs without the ERASE function are automatically erased before programming. Programmable Logic Device operation ƒ After programming is complete, verification should be performed according to the semiconductor manufacturer's specifications. In order to test vectors, a vector test should be performed (See vector test under the TEST menu). Finally, the part may be secured so that its content can no longer be examined or modified. The security function will not execute if the device fails to verify or pass the vector test properly. 28C256, 28C010, etc. ƒ 28CXXX family devices support Software Data Protection. The user has an option of either protecting or not protecting the data. This option must be changed before the start of any programming operation. To change this option, go to the Option selection under DEVICE/FUNCTION menu and make any changes accordingly. To obtain more information about Software Data Protection, please consult the device manufacturer’s specification. Microchip PIC devices ƒ Microchip PIC series is different from other Microcontrollers in that they have an EPROM area as well as a CONFIGURATION FUSE. The configuration fuse in the PIC family is used to setup Oscillator Type, Memory Code Protection, Watchdog Timer, or Processor Mode, and etc. After programming the EPROM portion, change the fuses of the items listed under Option. Then you must program the configuration option in the Option menu. Perform the following procedure: 1. Program the main memory 2. Click on the OPTION button 3. Set all of the configuration fuse in OPTION menu 4. Click on the Program configuration fuses button You may also read the status of the Configuration Fuse under the OPTION selection. In order to obtain more information about programming the

67

MaxLoader User’s Guide

configuration fuse, contact Microchip technology at 602-786-7200 or consult the appropriate data book.

Copy from a master chip to a new chip 1. Select the master device from select menu in Microcontroller. 2. Put the chip on the ZIF socket. 3. Click on the Device button and read the chip. 4. Click on the Option button and read the fuses. 5. Write down all of the option fuses [the memory protect must be disabled] in order to copy the information from your master chip. 6. Place a new chip. It must be the same chip as the master chip. 7. The buffer still holds your master data and the memory portion. 8. Click on Option again and set all the fuses that you wrote. 9. (To change the option, use the arrow button in the selection box.) 10. In the same Option menu, Click on the program configuration fuses, read and compare the fuses with your original device. CAUTION: The PIC16C711, will be used as an OTP (one time programmable) chip when you erase the secured device. You cannot reuse the chip after erasing it, even though the PIC16C711 is an erasable device. ƒ

MOTOROLA MC68HC908 devices

This device will require a security code in certain memory location when you program a new device along with data and users must remember the security data once read(copy)or verify the master device for duplication.

68

MaxLoader User’s Guide

ƒ Serial EEPROMs These devices are electrically erasable, but they operate serially rather than parallel. ƒ Atmel or Xilinx 17xxx You need to set the POLARITY FUSE with this family via the Option menu. After programming the main MEMORY, go to the OPTION menu and make the appropriate change. On OTP (One Time Programmable) devices, the POLARITY FUSE status cannot be reversed once it has been changed. Even on some of the windowed 7xxx family devices (excluding Xilinx 17xxD/L & 17128), the POLARITY FUSE cannot be toggled. Consult the device manufacturer for further instructions on how to handle the Polarity FUSE. CAUTION: Do not touch or remove a device during an operation when the BUSY green led is on.

69

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Auto Menu Option

Device / Read Read the data in the source device mounted on the ZIF socket into the buffer for examination. The checksum will be displayed on the checksum line. The buffer may be edited, saved to a disk, or used to duplicate the chip.

CAUTION: Reading the device into the buffer destroys the buffer contents through the specified range. Make sure everything in the buffer that is needed has been saved. PLD test vectors are not stored in a logic device; therefore, they cannot be read. The test vector buffer will be empty after reading the PLD.

70

MaxLoader User’s Guide

NOTE: Devices that have been secured cannot be read properly. Secured chips may appear all blank, fully programmed, or scrambled.

Device / Verify Assure that data in the device matches data in the memory buffer. If your device has the security fuse blown, a verification error is detected. The verify operation requires that the exact data pattern or file that was used to program the device be resident in the memory buffer.

Device / Data Compare Compares the data in device to the data in buffer and saves any difference into the COMPARE.TXT file. When you have a verify error during the Verify operation, the Data Compare command will be useful. It will detect a difference between the device content and the buffer content and will write the difference into the COMPARE.TXT file under the Maxloader (TopMax/TopMax 8Gang/ChipMax) directory. You may view the file using edited utility software.

Device / Erase This option erases the data in your socket before programming it. This operation is valid for only limited devices such as EEPROM, Flash Memory, GAL, PEEL devices. EPROMs that have a window should be erased by UV EPROM erasers externally (see NOTE “Erasing EPROMs” in this manual).

Device / Security Secure a PLD or Microcontroller so that their content can no longer be examined or modified. Security is confirmed when valid data can no longer be read or verified against a previously read pattern. To ensure that the security

71

MaxLoader User’s Guide

fuse has been blown, the Security operation is preceded by a “read” of the device and followed by a “verify.” NOTE: Usually, on a UV erasable PLD or a Microcontroller, a secured device may take longer to erase because the security bit address is designed to erase last.

NOTE: When you click on OPTION, device security mode and option fuses will be available for certain manufacture devices. Selecting these options, programmer will program your device with the checked options continuously. It is a useful feature for users who like to program devices in volume quantities. The user does not have to set the fuses or security modes for every programming. CAUTION: Some devices, such as Philips P89C52, can pass the BLANK CHECK routine after they are secured. Securing a device separates the programmed data pattern from unauthorized access. This command appears only when the selected device supports it. Some Microcontroller’s and PLDs can be secured by programming a special address location. The security bit will be cleared when the device is erased. Once a device is secured, it cannot be unsecured to read, verify, or duplicate. Also the secured device is seen as a blank chip even though it is not actually blank.

72

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Device / Encryption The encryption table is a feature of the 87C51/87C52 family Microcontroller devices. The Encryption array of the Microcontroller is initially unprogrammed (all '1's). In order to protect the code from being easily read by anyone other than the programmer, this feature allows you to program the encryption table that is exclusive NORead with the program code data as it is read out. You have to know its content in order to correctly decode the program code data. Thereafter you will have to use the same displayed encryption array any time you need to read back the device.

Device / Option 1 Device/Option /Customer ID ○

The user can store checksum or other code-identification numbers.

73

MaxLoader User’s Guide

2 Device/Option / Oscillator ○

Most PIC device family’s can be operated in four different oscillator modes. The user can choose one of the following modes from the factory. LP: Low Power Crystal XT: Crystal/Resonator HS: High Speed Crystal/Resonator RC: Resistor/Capacitor

3 Device/Option / WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT) ○

WDT is a configuration bit of special features for PIC device family’s. 4 Device/Option / POWER-UP TIMER ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family. 5 Device/Option / Memory Protect ○ This configuration fuse can be used to protect against spurious EEPROM writes.

74

MaxLoader User’s Guide

6 Device/Option / Data Protect ○

This feature may be enabled or disabled by the user; when shipped from an IC manufacturer, the Data Protect feature is disabled. Devices have “Software Data Protection (SDP)” : Provides software features to protect nonvolatile data from in advertent writes. Disable: The SDP command will not protect the entire memory array. Enable: The SDP command will protect the entire memory array. Certain Flash device has “Sector Protection” Protect All: By pressing the Protect All, no data will be erased or written into the device. You can still read data from the device. The block(s) doesn’t allow the device to be erased or programmed Unprotect : The selected block(s) allows the device to be erased or programmed. Toggle: Change the block status in reverse. Write Device: The selected block status will be written in the device. Close: Exit to main menu. 7 Device/Option / Reset Polarity ○ Reset Polarity (for Xilinx FPGA): The Polarity Fuse is ACTIVE HIGH when shipped from an IC manufacturer. To change the polarity, click on the Option button and check on the Reset bit box before programming your device. Once it changes to ACTIVE LOW, it may not reset the ACTIVE LOW fuse to ACTIVE HIGH. On OTP (One Time Programmable) devices, the POLARITY FUSE status cannot be reversed once it has been changed. Even on some of the windowed 7xxx family devices (excluding Xilinx 17xxD/L & 17128), the POLARITY FUSE cannot be toggled. Consult the device manufacturer for further instructions on how to handle the Polarity FUSE. 8 Device/Option / Drown Out ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family.

75

MaxLoader User’s Guide

9 Device/Option / MCLR ○

This is a special feature for the PIC device family. 10 Device/Option / Memory Parity ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family. 11 Device/Option / Low Voltage PGM ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family. 12 Device/Option / FLASH Write Enable ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family. 13 Device/Option / Background DBG ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family. 14 Device/Option / Brownout Voltage ○ This is a special feature for the PIC device family. NOTE: All the Options above are described in the device manufacturer’s data book. Make sure that you understand all configuration features before setting the configuration fuses. 15 Option Item/Read Current Configuration Fuses ○

In order to have the information of all configuration fuses, press this button and you can see all configuration data of the current device. Be sure that you remember all the fuse’s information if you want to copy the configuration information 16 Option Item/Program Current Configuration Fuses ○ Pressing this button will store all configuration fuse’s information in the current device located in the programmer socket.

76

MaxLoader User’s Guide

17 Device/Option/Read Status Byte or Boot Vector ○

In order to have the information of option bits, press this button and you can see all option lock bit data of the current device. Be sure that you remember all the fuse’s information if you want to copy the configuration information. 18 Device/Option/Program Status Byte or Boot Vector ○ Pressing this button will store all lock bit information in the current device located in the programmer socket. 19 Device/Option/Initialize Device ○ Initialize function erases the whole memory array, security lock bits, and status byte and boot vector into their initial erased state. Press this button before erasing all 89Cxx family manufactured by Philips.

Device / Auto Auto command will enable you to do the following command steam sequentially and it is useful to program a volume quantity devices with the same data.

77

MaxLoader User’s Guide

CAUTION: Some devices such as Philips P98C52 can pass the BLANK CHECK routine after they are secured without being blank. Securing a device prevents the programmed data pattern into the device from unauthorized access. This command appears only when the selected device supports it. Some Microcontrollers and PLDs can be secured by programming a special address location. The security bit will be cleared when the device is erased. Once a device is secured, it cannot be unsecured to read, verify, or duplicate. Also the secured device is seen as a blank chip even though it is not actually blank.

Test

( These functions are only for TopMax, TopMaxII, UniMax ) Test / Vector Test Verifies that the PLD (PAL, GAL EPLD, etc.) currently behaves without having to prototype a circuit. In order to perform test vectors, test vectors should be in the JEDEC file when the file is loaded. Most PLD development software will generate valid test vectors automatically. Test vectors may be examined and modified with Vector Pattern Edit/^F6 command in the buffer menu screen. NOTE: Due to hardware’s limitation, Vector Test is only implemented on 24pin or less devices.

78

MaxLoader User’s Guide

During the vector test, TopMax applies high and low signals to the input pins of a tested PLD and observes signals at the output pins. The output results are compared to the expected results from the test vectors. Any difference will show up as an error message. The following are valid characters for test vectors: 0 Apply input logic low (Vil) to an input pin 1 Apply input logic high (Vih) to an input pin C Clock an input pin (Vil, Vih, Vil) F Float pin N Power pin or untested output pin V VCC pin X Don't care: output values are not tested G GND pin K Clock an inverted input pin (Vih, Vil, Vih) H Expected result on output pin is Vih L Expected result on output pin is Vil Z Test for high impedance Optional Operation X value Optional value of “don’t care” Vcc Test Vcc value on Vcc pin Delay Test period of each vector in mill-second

Test / IC Test This operation tests TTL or CMOS logic devices according to the test patterns stored in the test pattern library. Click on the Select button and enter a device name and click on Test to begin the test function. A result message will be displayed after testing.

79

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Config

Config / Select Product

After the Maxloader is installed, you can choose one of the programmer listed in Select product menu. Make sure that you select a right model and turn on the switch (TopMax /, TopMaxII, ProMax-4/8G) or connect the AC cord (UniMax, ChipMax/ChipMax2)

80

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Config / Config Option

Config Option / Buffer Clear Before File Loading When loading a file into the buffer, executing the ENABLE option fills the buffer with the data that is defined in Default Buffer Value before the file is loaded into the buffer. When you load a file that is smaller than the current buffer size, the unfilled buffer will contain the Default Buffer Value so that you may examine the buffer data more conveniently. DISABLE option keeps the same data for the unfilled buffer area after Buffer Load command is executed. NOTE: Buffer Clear means that the current buffer will be filled with the Default Buffer Value. It can be any data of Hexadecimal values such as FF, 00, or XX

81

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Config Option / Blank Check Before Programming Enabling Blank Check Before Programming verifies whether the device is erased before programming. Disabling Auto Blank Check Before Programming prevents this check from occurring. Config Option / Verify After Reading Setting the configuration menu to ENABLE will allow you to verify whether the device data is the same as the data in your current buffer after reading the source device. Config Option / verify after programming Setting the option to ENABLE will allow you to verify whether the device data is the same as the one in your current buffer after programming a device. Config Option / Byte order swapping This option applies only to 16-bit wide (E)EPROMs or Flash Memory. User data is displayed in the buffer according to the Intel convention with the default value set at Disable. Enabling this option allows you to use data according to the Motorola convention during Program and Verify operations under the Device selection. However, the data in the buffer is not physically swapped. When enabled, the MSB (Most Significant Byte) of data is located to EVEN addresses (0,2,4,...) and the LSB(Least Significant Byte) of data is located to ODD addresses(1,3,5,...). For example, Byte swap is useful if an assembler creates a file in Intel format, in which the low byte is read before the high byte, but the file must be in Motorola format, in which the high byte is read before the low byte. Sample data file (Motorola EXORmacs Format, Code 87): S00B00004441544120492F4FF3 S11300000123456789ABCDEF001122334455667750 S9030000FC Data file opened with format 87 and displayed in the editor (8-bit addressing mode): CURSOR AT LOCATION: 00000000 8 BIT ADDRESSING HEXADECIMAL

82

ASCII

MaxLoader User’s Guide

ADDRESS -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F 0123456789ABCDEF 00000000 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD EF 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 .#Eg . . ”3Duf w 00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Example #1: Programming one 16-bit device (Data word width = 16, Odd/even byte swap = disabled) The user data is allocated as follows: Device MSB LSB Device Address: 0 23 01 1 67 45 2 AB 89 3 EF CD Sample data file (Motorola EXORmacs Format, Code 87): S00B00004441544120492F4FF3 S11300000123456789ABCDEF001122334455667750 S9030000FC Data file opened with format 87 and displayed in the editor (8-bit addressing mode): CURSOR AT LOCATION: 00000000 8 BIT ADDRESSING HEXADECIMAL ADDRESS -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F

ASCII 0123456789ABCDEF

00000000 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD EF 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 .#E.g. . . ”3DUf w 00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Example #2: Programming one 16-bit device (Data word width = 16, Odd/even byte swap = Enabled) The user data is allocated as follows Device MSB LSB Device Address: 0 01 23

83

MaxLoader User’s Guide

1 2 3

45 89 CD

67 AB EF

Config Option / Device Insert Test

When enabled, this test will allow the Maxloader to first examine the physical position of a device as it is sitting in the programming socket when the user attempts to take any action to that device. Once it has finished examining, the Maxloader will prompt the user for corrective steps if needed depending upon the position of the device. Once you click on “Device Insert Test,” Maxloader will display “Incorrect device ID” if your target device contains ID or if wrong device is placed inside the socket. You may see the same message if the device has been secured or if the device ID has been erased. Click on “Yes” if you want to ignore the manufacturer’s device ID and proceed. Config Option / Device ID Check

Check the device with both manufacturer and device part number before run any operation for the target device in the socket. If you program an EPROM,

84

MaxLoader User’s Guide

you may allow to skip the device ID check routine when the device size and programming voltage between the EPROM in socket and the part in menu. Config Option / Sound A default sound comes when you need attention during programming time such as “blank check error,” “program error,” or “Verification error.” Config Option / Default Buffer Value Fill the buffer value (hexadecimal) with the initial data that you type in this field. This feature helps the user who wants to have different initial values ('00' or 'FF') in the buffer. In most case, the default buffer value should be set up as “00” before loading a hex file. Config Option / 32 Bit Checksum The digit of Checksum value appears in 4 (hex) numbers as standard checksum Value. For 8 digit checksum value, click on the option box “32 Bit check sum” and maxloader display 8 (hex) numbers in the Check sum location.

85

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Config Option / Port (TopMax, ChipMax)

A parallel port address can be determined by the Maxloader (TopMax/ChipMax) software. Auto : TopMax/ChipMax will select a valid parallel port as the default address in your PC. LPT1 : The parallel port 378 in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax address. LPT2 : The parallel port 3BC in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax address. LPT3 : The parallel port 278 in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax address. Port Speed: Because the ISA-bus clock speed is not as fast as that of the CPU, we designed this option to facilitate the problem caused when using a fast computer such as Pentium 90/133/166 MHz. The default value is 0. For computers that have CPU speed of greater or equal to 133 MHz, we recommend

86

MaxLoader User’s Guide

that you set the Port Delay to 40. In most cases, this option will help to solve the communication problem between your PC and TopMax/ChipMax). NOTE: TopMax / ChipMax power switch should be ON. The Parallel cable is connected between TopMax / ChipMax and your PC parallel port. Make sure that the shields on each side of the cable are locked. See section 6 Troubleshooting if you are having difficulty with installation and communication.

Config Option / USB Option (USB programmer) USB option / Enable START button This option allows you to use a start key in USB programmer hardware rather than PC control software. Once you check in the this option and choose a master socket, the socket location will be selected as a master socket without opening the gang program mode(separate menu screen). So you can the multiple programmer ,ProMax-4G(8G), as a single-socked programmer. We can see the socket number in either beginning menu screen or gang program mode menu.

Enabling #4 socket to be master socket 87

MaxLoader User’s Guide

USB option / Good LED off on socket open This option enable the LED light will not blink after done an operation. So, user can recognize the empty socket is not being effective for any operation.

USB option / Enable “START ALL” button This option enables any of the START button in multi-site programmer to be a start button for all others. So, customers don’t need to press individual button as an auto programming mode. Customers who want to operate a separate operation for individual Start Button key must un-checked this option.

88

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Enabling any of button to be a “Start Key”

Config Option / Gang Split Select

Gang (useful only TopMax, ChipMax) Do not use this option for USB interface programmer.

89

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Concurrent Gang Mode must be used in menu for USB multiple socket programmers. TopMax-8G(no longer since Jan. 2006) programs multiple E(E)PROMs up to eight devices at the same time. In order to program multiple E(E)PROMs, users must use TopMax-8G. TopMax-8G is especially useful when it is necessary to program many devices with the same data simultaneously. TopMax-8G is designed for multiple programming and it does not support set programming. Split When programming devices for a 16-bit or 32-bit environment, you will need to split your data onto two or four devices. NOTE: SPLITTING DATA is different from SETTING DATA. Putting buffer data into multiple devices is called “SET DATA.” Maxloader doesn’t support the SET DATA. EXAMPLE 1: PROGRAMMING TWO 8-BIT EPROM AS FOLLOWS: Byte $0000 Byte $0001 Byte $0002 Byte $0003 Byte $0000

Byte $0001

Byte $0002

Byte $0003

:

:

1. Load a 16-bit file into the buffer. 2. Select the target device from menu. 3. Insert the target device (#1) into the ZIF socket.

90

MaxLoader User’s Guide

4. Click on EVEN in Split data menu. 5. Program the device (#1). 6. Remove the device (#1) and insert the second device (#2) into the ZIF socket. 7. Click on ODD. 8. Program the second device. Now, you have two 8-bit EPROMs that have been programmed. The first EPROM (#1) contains all the even address or low bytes and the second (#2) device contains all the odd address or high bytes. EXAMPLE 2: PROGRAMMING FOUR 8-BIT EPROMS AS FOLLOWS: Byte $0000 Byte $0001 Byte $0002 Byte $0003 Byte $0004 Byte $0005 Byte $0006 Byte $0007

: Byte $0000

Byte $0001

Byte $0002

Byte $0003

Byte $0004

Byte $0005

Byte $0006

Byte $0007

:

:

:

:

1. Select the target EPROM. 2. Load the HEX file (32-bit file) into the buffer. 3. Insert the first EPROM (#1) into the socket. 4. Invoke Word 0 in Split Data menu. 5. Program the mounted device. 6. Remove the programmed device (#1) and insert the second device (#2) into the socket. 7. Follow the same steps as above.

91

MaxLoader User’s Guide

After programming the 4th EPROM with Word 3, you will have four 8-bit programmed EPROMs. The original file (32-bit) is split into four EPROMs that contain 8-bit data in each device.

Config Option / Address

Device Address These address will be applied for programming the buffer data. -Chip Start: Device Starting address for the data to be programmed in buffer. -Chip End: Device Ending address for the data to be programmed in buffer. -Buffer Start: Buffer Starting address for the data to be programmed. -Buffer End: Buffer Ending address for the data to be programmed. NOTE: Device size for different devices Device 2716 2732 2764 27128 27256 27010/1024 27020/2048 27040/4096 92

Device Address 0 - 7FF 0 - FFF 0 - 1FFF 0 - 3FFF 0 - FFFF 0 - 1FFFF 0 - 3FFFF 0 – 7FFFF

MaxLoader User’s Guide

File Load These address will be applied for programming the buffer data. -File Offset is subtracted from addresses from the file downloaded to the programmer. For example, if you set File Offset to 1000h, then the downloaded data minus 1000h would be placed into the buffer at the address specified by the Buffer Start Address. -Buffer Start Address is the address in the buffer where you want your downloaded data to start. For example, if you set Buffer Start Address to 800h, then the downloaded data only appears in the buffer beginning at address 800h. File Save These address will be applied for programming the buffer data. -Buffer Start: Starting address for data to be saved. -Buffer End: Ending address for data to be saved.

Config Option / Auto Inc

The feature allows users to program a certain area that might contain a serial number in the memory device with serialized number by a certain value. Start : Start address of memory that contains serialized data End : End address of memory Inc Value : This value will be added to the previous data value

93

MaxLoader User’s Guide

User must click on Auto Increment to program a memory with data increased by one to the previous data.

Config / Hardware test

A hardware test is designed to assist customers in confirming and diagnosing problems relating to all programmers. If a hardware defect with a programmer is suspected, we recommend the users to run this test in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred with the programmer.

Config / Concurrent(gang) mode Since the technology for USB allows to make a hub port available in a PC, we introduce multiple socket programmers, ProMax (4G, 8G), also multiple singlesocked programmers can be operated as GANG PROGRAM MODE while the same model are connected in a USB hub(4 or 8) . With the Start key in USB programmer, a programmer command stream such as Erase/Blank/Program/Verify/Security can be executed without PC software control. You can execute individual socket with corresponding start button or all socket together with pressing any of START button.

94

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Do not touch the device in socket until the operation stream is not finished (stopped). Each operation in different socket can be displayed with blue color bar in menu screen.

This pictures illustrates how to set any of Start key enable all 8 sockets. This option enables any of the START button in multi-site programmer to be a start button for all others. So, customers don’t need to press individual button as an auto programming mode

95

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Enabling any button to be a “Start Key” The individual socket with a serial number can be executed once the Start button is pressed. After check the Enables START ALL button box in Config option, all 8 sockets will be executed when you click on any of the “START” key in Gang program. The START ALL button make all socket If the box is not checked, individual socket will be executed once the button that contains a serial number (actual programming socket) is clicked.

96

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Wait 10 – 30 seconds for recognizing all sockets and you can see each socket’s serial number in GANG PROGRAM MODE. There two different features in the ProMax programmer operations. One feature is that Data in buffer memory can be simply duplicated into more one socket(duplication). Other feature is splitting data in buffer to the sockets by same size(set) as much as the same buffer size of selected 8-bit memory device. It calls “Set Programming.” Program Opt.: Program options for automation programming. This operation steam will be executed once click on individual socket or START ALL button is clicked. Serial NO.: Indicates all hardware serial numbers. STATUS: Indicates executable command status in each programming location. PASS: Indicates the number of devices passed. FAIL: Indicates the number of devices failed. Reset : Set 0 in all of PASS / FAIL number. Close : Quite the current menu windows. 97

MaxLoader User’s Guide

How to program (write) a same file into different sockets ?

If the target device is 8-bit EPROM such as 2764,128,256,512,101, make the Set Program Mode disabled. The Set Program menu button will not be appeared for all other(non-8 bit) device selection.

Set “Disable” in Set Program option which is not available for non-8 bit EPROM.

98

MaxLoader User’s Guide

EXAMPLE 1: PROGRAM 8 OF 27128 EPROMS WITH SAME DATA: 1. Select the target device(27128) and Load a file that should be same size as the selected Device size. The target devices could be any devices. 2. Click on the “Gang Program Mode” button. 3. Set Disable for the “Set program” in menu screen. 4. Insert as many as devices in the open sockets. 5. Click a button with serial number or the “START ALL” button and a programming steam will be executed. This diagram illustrates how to write(program) buffer data(0000-3FFF for 27128 selection) in eight sockets with same data. All devices in 8 sockets must be identical and data in devices will be same after programming. If a device in a group failed during programming, the remaining devices will be programmed; then, a replacement device must be placed in the same socket as the failed device

99

MaxLoader User’s Guide

The next diagram illustrates how to travel the same buffer data(0000-3FFF for 27128 selection) to the eight sockets.

Click for individual socket operation

100

Click for operating all sockets at once, concurrent mode

MaxLoader User’s Guide

How to program(write) buffer ( blocks) data into different sockets ? This option is not available for all other devices that are not 8-bit EPROMs. The menu screen below illustrates that there is no Set Program button because the device selected DA28F320J5 is not 8-bit EPROM.

Set “Enable” in Set Program option that make all sockets with an EPROM are available for “Set Programming.”

101

MaxLoader User’s Guide

NOTE: Who may need the “set Programming ?” A file can be fit in an EPROM and the file size becomes bigger than the EPROM, so the large file should be split into more than one EPROMs. The ProMax software will split a file up to 8 blocks and program them in different EPROMs. If the data blocks in buffer are less than the total socket numbers(4,8), same data block can be programmed in different sockets. You can assign the same data block in different socket because there will be empty sockets. So, you can assign each socket for different data block.

EXAMPLE 2: SET PROGRAM FOR 8 OF 27128 EPROMS: 1. Select the target part 27128 and Load a file that should bigger than the selected EPROM size(3FFF). 2. Click on the “Gang Program Mode” button. 3. Set Enable for the “Set program” menu 4. Assign a block file for each socket as

102

MaxLoader User’s Guide

(customer must know the total length of file and how split the buffer data into the EPROMs in sockets). 5. Click a button with serial number or the “START ALL” button and a programming steam will be executed. As illustrated in the diagram, data is routed to sockets in sequential order(the first block of data goes to the first socket, the second block to the second, etc.). If a device in a group failed during programming, the remaining devices will be programmed; then, a replacement device must be placed in the same socket as the failed device

103

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Config / Language

This option will help customer who want to use the Maxloader menu as native language with the OS that is installed for own languages.

7. TROUBLE SHOOTING & TECHNICAL SUPPORT This section provides customer support information such as the return material authorization policy as well as methods of obtaining E.E.Tools’ technical assistance and software updates. All programmers are designed to require a minimum of technical support for both hardware and software. Since we make the product in USA, we supply qualified programmers as trouble-free as possible.

1. Registration A registration card is located in the user guide manual with the CD-ROM software .Complete the card and returns it to E.E. Tools to become eligible for: • Customer support, warranty service and technical assistance

104

MaxLoader User’s Guide

• Notification and special pricing on new products and upgrades Registration is particularly important if the programmer was purchased from a dealer, a distributor or through your purchasing department. Why not take a moment right now to complete the card.

2. Software Updates Your programmer is designed to be highly flexible and programmable, allowing it to program a wide variety of chips. Consequently, when a problem does arise, it can usually be fixed with just a free software update. The new software updates are available from our WEB page at www.eetools.com Use the new software if you have any other incorrect programming results.

3. Testing the Hardware Make sure that your programmer works properly before you call us for technical assistance. Refer to Hardware Test section in the Config menu.

4. Quick Self-Diagnostics In order to provide accurate and fast technical assistance, we recommend that you check the following information before you call our technical support department. We recommend that you obtain the latest software revision before calling our support line with a software problem. Eighty percent of our technical support calls result in asking the user to obtain the latest version of the software. ƒ For USB programmers TopMaxII, UniMax, ChipMax2, you should install the USB driver in your PC after install PC control software. The USB driver is in either CD-ROM or C:\Program Files\EE Tools directory. ƒ

ProMax-4G will need the USB installation 4 times and ProMax-8G does 8 times. This installation should be done once you install the ProMax in your PC. Be sure that you use the same USB port for the ProMax programmer , otherwise you have to install the USB drivers again for different port. Do not power Off and ON in 30 seconds and you must wait over 30 seconds

105

MaxLoader User’s Guide

once you un-plug an USB cable from PC(USB Hub) and plug-in the same cable. ƒ ƒ ƒ

Be sure the device selected matches the device being used. For multi-site programmer usage, make sure all devices are identical. For a device that uses an adapter, be sure that the adapter is correctly oriented, seated properly, and the ZIF socket lever is down. ƒ Be sure power cord is securely attached to programmer and power pack to wall socket. ƒ Be sure that power switch is ON. ƒ Be sure that the parallel cable (IEEE standard, 25 pins and wires) is correctly and securely attached to the programmer and PC. The connection must be direct; there cannot be any software keys or locks between the parallel port and the programmer. Most switch boxes may also cause difficulties. ƒ You may need to change your printer port [even though it is working fine with your printer] because TopMax/Chip Max communicates with your computer via the printer port in a bi-directional mode.

5. Contacting Customer Support E.E.Tools provides telephone technical assistance during normal business hours (9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Pacific time). ƒ Please call our Technical Support Department or your local E.E.Tools’ distributor while you are at your computer and be prepared to repeat the sequence of steps leading up to the problem. ƒ Submit your support request to [email protected] or you may log-in www.eetools.com and submit your request . ƒ Have the following information ready when you call or send support request to [email protected]: - The invoice number for the user who bought programmer from E.E.Tools. 106

MaxLoader User’s Guide

- The distributor's name and the purchased date. - The model & serial number found in the back side of programmer.. - The hardware software revision number from option info location at the Maxloader software screen. - Description of problem with error message. - The exact part number and package type you are working with. - The adapter part number for non-standard package.

6. Service Information Before sending a unit in for service, call us at 408-263-2221 to obtain a Return Authorization Number (RMA). We will not repair your unit unless an RMA was issued. Warranty Service: Please return the product in the original package with proof of purchase to the below address. Clearly state in writing the performance problem and send any leads, connectors and accessories that you are using with the device. Non-Warranty Service: Return the product in the original packaging to the below address. Clearly state in writing the performance problem and return any leads, connectors and accessories that you are using with the device. Customers not on open account must include payment in the form of a money order or credit card. For the most current repair charges contact the factory before shipping the product. Return all merchandise to E.E. Tools, Inc., with pre-paid shipping. The flat-fee repair charge includes return ground shipping to addresses in North America only. For overnight shipments and non-North America shipping fees contact E.E. Tools. Inc.

107

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Electronic Engineering Tools, Inc 4620 Fortran Drive, Suite 102 San Jose, CA 95134, USA. Tel : (408)263-2221 Fax : (408)263-2230 www.eetools.com Include with the instrument your complete return shipping address, contact name, phone number, and description of problem.

7. Limited One-Year Warranty E.E. Tools, Inc., warrants to the original purchaser that its product and the component parts thereof, will be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date of purchase. E.E. Tools, Inc., will, without charge, repair or replace, at its option, defective products or component parts. Returned products must be accompanied by proof of the purchase date in the form of a sales receipt. To obtain warranty coverage in the U.S.A., this product must be registered by completing and mailing the enclosed warranty card to: E.E. Tools, Inc., 4620 Fortran Drive, Suite 102, San Jose, CA 95134, USA. Within fifteen (15) days from proof of purchase Exclusions: This warranty does not apply in the event of misuse or abuse of the product or as a result of unauthorized alterations or repairs. It is void if the serial number is alternated, defeated, or removed.

108

MaxLoader User’s Guide

E.E. Tools, Inc. shall not be liable for any consequential damages, including without limitations to damages resulting from loss of use. Some states do not allow limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific rights and you may have other rights, which vary from state-to-state. Model Number:___________________ Date Purchased:______________

8. Useful Web Site Addresses/ Phone Numbers EE Tools, Inc. .....................................www.eetools.com ALTERA.............................................www.altera.com AMD ..............................................www.amd.com INTEL .............................................. www.intel.com ATMEL ..............................................www.atmel.com CYPRESS ...........................................www.cypress.com DALLAS SEMI. .................................www.dalsemi.com HITACHI ............................................www.halsp.hitachi.com INTEL ..............................................www.intel.com ISSI ..............................................www.issi.com LATTICE SEMI. ...............................www.latticesemi.com MITSUBISHI......................................www.mitsubishi.com MICROCHIP ...................................... www.microchip.com MOTOROLA......................................www.motorola.com NATIONAL SEMI. ............................www.national.com NEC ..............................................www.nec.com OKI SEMI...........................................www.okisemiconductor.com PHILIPS SEMI. ..................................www.semiconductors.philips.com ROHM ..............................................www.rohm.com SEEQ ..............................................www.seeq.com

109

MaxLoader User’s Guide

SILICON STORAGE .........................www.ssti.com ST MICRO..........................................www.st.com TEMIC ..............................................www.temic.com T.I. ..............................................www.ti.com TOSHIBA ...........................................www.toshiba.com WAFERSCALE ..................................www.waferscale.com WINBOND .........................................www.winbond.com XICOR ..............................................www.xicor.com XILINX ..............................................www.xilinx.com ZILOG ..............................................www.zilog.com

9. Programming Adapter Manufacturers Compass Systems (Asia)..................www.compass21.com EE Tools, Inc. .....................................www.eetools.com Emulation Technology........................www.1800adapter.com Emulation Solutions............................www.adapters.com Logical System....................................www.logicalsys Iron Wood ...........................................www.ironwoodelectronics.com

10. EPROM Emulator Manufacturers EE Tools, Inc. .....................................www.eetools.com Tech Tools ..........................................www.tech-tools.com

8. OTHER PRODUCTS Optional EPROM Emulator ƒ . 110

EeRom-8U : Memory Emulation System for R&D and Engineering Part Communication –USB Port (1.1) Operation Software-Wind98/ME/2000/XP Low Voltage Supports-3.3V/5V Target Connect - 32Pin Dip Cable (Standard) 32Pin PLCC POD (Option)

MaxLoader User’s Guide

-

Buffer Memory – 8M,12ns SRAM ( 8bit) Download Speed – 1Mbyte/sec Reset Signal – Low/High Software Control Supports Device – E/EPROM : 2764-27080, 2864-28256 Flash Memory : 29512-29040 Size – 98x 63x 22 (mm)

The requirement to use the Window graphical application is : ƒ Processor: IBM PC or Compatible Pentium/100 MHz or better. ƒ RAM : 5MB ƒ DISK : 5MB ƒ Port : USB ƒ CD ROM Drive for Installation ƒ OS : Windows 98/ME/2000/XP ƒ Target Systems of EeRom-8U Your target board required the following memory type for proper emulation with EeRom-8U. The basic EeRom-8U supports 8Mbits with 45NS Memory.

111

MaxLoader User’s Guide

9. ABOUT NAND FLASH MEMORY Comparison of NOR and NAND Flash technologies

Why NAND Flash NAND-based flash is a low-cost high-capacity memory technology commonly used in large data applications such as digital cameras, 3G cell phones, PDAs, etc. In addition to using this data storage capability, manufacturers have found it beneficial in many cases to program code into NAND flash devices.

112

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Embedded and mobile systems are increasingly using NAND flash for storage because it has various advantages over other storage technologies. As always though, life is a compromise and those advantages come with some limitations that need to be addressed to provide a robust flash file system. Hard disks are not a viable storage option for many embedded and handheld systems because they are too big, too fragile and use too much power Major difference is that NAND is shipped with marked bad blocks on the device, while NOR chips are shipped defect free. Thus, one expects to encounter some failures in NAND and should design accordingly.

How to Program NAND Flash Since all Nand Flash contains BAD Block, NAND Flash developer should know: • • • •

What is the input parameter of ROM writer for supporting the preprogramming in NAND flash memory Master image file. The number of NAND flash memory blocks. Refer to NAND flash memory specification. The number of Reservoir blocks in NAND flash memory.(Refer to GBBM specification.) GBBM (Global Bad Block Management) manages the bad blocks of the whole NAND flash memory. Note: Usually, new developers for NAND Flash should have a solution how to program their devices with NAND Flash semiconductor engineers and programmer vendor’s software development engineer.

How to READ NAND Flash There is no global standard file system for NAND Flash programming for programmer vendors yet. Hence, customer who understand how to program 113

MaxLoader User’s Guide

NAND Flash is not hard to expect that READ(copy) a NAND Flash is very difficult project unless the customer knows all information how to program the master NAND Flash. EE Tools support most NAND device with specialized file systems and simple algorithm with ‘skipping bad blocks’. Please contact support.eetools.com for further assistance. Visit the www.nandflash.com if you want to know further information about NAND Flash memory.

10. GLOSSARY BGA Bipolar PROM Blank Check Buffer Checksum

Compare

Device Die

DIP FPGA

114

Ball Grid Array. A surface mount device with solder balls and a high pin count, similar to PGA. A fuse-link programmable PROM. A test performed by a device programmer to ascertain whether a device has been programmed (partial or total) or is in a virgin state. Data storage unit directly stored on CPU. A number that results by adding up every element of a pattern. Typically either a four or eight digit HEX number, it is a quick way to identify a pattern, since it is very unlikely that two patterns will have the same checksum. Reading a programmable device and displaying any discrepancies from the desired pattern. Each error is displayed on the screen. This comparison is slower to perform than a verify on the programmer. Microchip or Integrated Circuit chip. The silicon chip that is located within an IC package. It is a small rectangular flat piece of silicon that has been fabricated with many transistors to perform a specific function. It is glued into a plastic or ceramic package and connected to the external metal interconnect pins of the IC with very small bonding wires. It can be seen through the window of erasable EPROMs. Dual Inline Package. An IC package with two rows of through-hole pins, usually on 0.1 pitch, 0.3 or 0.6 inches apart. Field Programmable Gate Array. A very complex PLD. The FPGA usually has an architecture that comprises a large number of simple logic blocks, a

MaxLoader User’s Guide

number of input/output pads, and a method to make random connections between the elements. Functional Test A test that is performed following the programming of a PLD. The test operates the device in its normal operating mode by simulating the inputs and outputs that the part will experience in normal operation. To perform the test, the engineer must supply a set of test vectors that describe normal operation of the device so the device programmer can apply the specified stimulus and verify that the device is operating as designed. It is important to perform a functional test on PLDs because, in many cases, the PLD cannot be fully tested at the factory before programming so a defective PLD may program correctly but fail the functional test. A properly designed functional test will verify that the part meets the design specification, ensuring that the device, the compiler, the programmer, and the engineer have all performed their respective tasks correctly. Fuse A metal connection within a PLD or memory that may be melted during programming to break the circuit. These links typically carry input signals to logic gates. Burning all the fuses except those that are required in the desired circuit forms the desired circuit configuration. Since the fuses cannot be tested nondestructively, fuse-like programmable devices cannot be 100% tested at the factory and consequently expected programming yields are usually 98-99%. GAL Generic Array Logic. EEPROM based second generation PAL devices. Gang Programmer A multiple-socket programmer that requires each device to be placed in a socket before any can be programmed. See Concurrent Programmer. HEX file A human-readable ASCII file that represents any binary data. Each byte in the binary pattern is represented by two HEX characters (0-9, A-F) so that any of the 256 possible bytes, which include both control and unprintable characters, may be printed. The HEX file may also contain address or checksum information. The pattern represented by the HEX file may be represented by a binary file or any of the HEX file formats – any file format may contain any pattern. The names of the HEX file formats (Intel, Motorola,

115

MaxLoader User’s Guide

I/O JEDEC

JEDEC file

LCC

Memory device

Microcontroller

116

Tektronix, etc.) indicate who standardized its format and does not indicate anything about the pattern or the device the pattern is intended for. Input/ Output. Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (pronounced JED’eck). A group organized by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) that has defined a standard file format for PLDs. A file conforming to a standard format that specifies the configuration and testing procedure for a PLD. The file is in a human-readable ASCII format and consists of fields that start with a letter and end with an asterisk. Fields specify the pattern to program into the part, whether to secure the device, a set of test vectors to perform a functional test, and checksums to verify the integrity of the file. Leadless Chip Carrier. A square ceramic package that has no leads; Instead it has metal areas that are surface-mount soldered to the target circuit. This package is usually used only for military and aerospace applications. Available up to 84 pins. A Device that contains an array of storage locations. The device has a set of inputs, called address, which specify which location in the array is being accessed. A set of input/output pins produce the stored number (pattern) when the device is read, and accept a new value when the device is written or programmed. Additionally, there are one or more input pins that select the operating move (read, write, standby, etc.). Memory devices may be classified by whether they are volatile or nonvolatile, and whether they may be erased. The memory’s organization refers to its word width and the number of words in the device. A device that contains a central processing unit (CPU), memory, and I/O ports on a single IC. Microcontrollers that contain any form of nonvolatile memory may be programmed on a device programmer. When connected to a power supply and external crystal, many of these devices form a complete microcomputer.

MaxLoader User’s Guide

Non-Volatile

Oscillator OTP

Package PGA

PLCC

PLD Compiler

The Characteristic of a memory that does not lose its contents when its power is removed. Non-volatile memory is useful in microcomputer circuits because it can provide instructions for a CPU as soon as the power is applied, before secondary devices, such as disk, can be accessed. Non-Volatile memory includes ROM, EPROM and EEPROM. A device that produces an alternating output current. One-time programmable. The characteristic of a memory device that can be programmed once but cannot be erased. When an EPROM is described as OTP, this means that its die is erasable when exposed to ultraviolet light, but because of its package, which is not transparent, it cannot be exposed to light and thus it cannot be erased. The plastic or ceramic that protects an IC die and connects it to the target circuit. Pin Grid Array. A square, through-hold IC package that has pins located on a square grid with 0.1000-inch pitch. It may have up to several hundred pins. Used primarily for military and prototype designs. Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier, A square plastic package that has J-shaped leads on four sides. This can be surface mounted or placed in a socket for throughhole use. Available in 20 to 84 pins. A software package that allows an engineer to specify the functionality of a PLD through a high-level language or schematic diagram. The software will convert the design into a JEDEC or other file for the PLD programmer. PLD compilers are available from numerous IC manufacturers and from third parties. The packages from IC manufacturers support only one brand of device and may be free, inexpensive or expensive. The most popular compiler is PALASM (prices under $200, available from AMD sales offices and representatives), which supports most of AMD’s line of PLDs with an easy-to-learn high-level language. The compiler that probably offers the highest level of functionality and flexibility is PLDmaster made by Logical Devices. It supports most PLDs and offers a sophisticated input language with full support for state machines and other complex constructs,

117

MaxLoader User’s Guide

PQFP QFP

RAM ROM

Serial Memory

Socket module SOIC

Test vector

TQF TSOP

118

partitioning designs into several PLDs, and graphical input. Their tools run on PCs and workstations. PLD compilers have simulators that can be used to test the functionality of your design and validate test vectors that you design before programming a device. Plastic Quad Flat Pack. See QFP. Quad Flat Pack. A square IC package that has surface-mount leads coming from four sides. It is used for high-density applications, usually over 100 pins. Lead pitch may be 0.025 inches or smaller. Random Access Memory. A volatile memory device. Read Only Memory. A non-volatile memory device that cannot be programmed by the user. It is programmed at the factory through the use of a mask pattern in the final fabrication steps of the die. An EPROM or EEPROM that is accessed by shifting in addresses and shifting out data one bit at a time. Interfaces are available using one, two or three wires for clock, data in, and data out. An interchangeable metal chassis that contains a programming socket. Small Outline Integrated Circuit. A surface-mount IC package that has two rows of leads on opposite sides. Commonly found in 8 to 32 pin sizes. Leads are usually 0.050 pitch. A set of characters that describe the inputs and outputs of a device during a functional test. There is one character in the vector for each pin on the device. Numbers represent inputs to be applied to the device (1 for Vih, 0 for Vil). Letters represent the outputs that must be tested (H for Voh, L for Vol, Z for high-impedance). During the test, the part will be powered up and each input will be applied to the device for the first vector. Then, each output will be applied to the device for the first vector. This process will continue for each vector and any errors will be reported. Thin Quad Flat Pack. Similar to QFP but with a lower profile and physically smaller in length and width. Thin Small Outline Package. A surface-mount package with fine-pitch leads (usually 0.025 inch pitch) on two sides. This package is very low profile and

MaxLoader User’s Guide

UV Erasable

Verify

Word width

commonly available in a reverse (mirror image) pin out used to simplify circuit board layout. Usually 32 to 44 pins. The characteristic of an EPROM that allows it to be erased with exposure to short –wave ultra-violet light. This high-energy light can discharge the floating-gate transistor cells that store bits in an EPROM. The most common source of such light is a mercury vapor tube much like an ordinary fluorescent tube, but without the phosphor that turns the UV light emitted by the mercury into visible light. The light from ordinary fluorescent lamps or sunlight generally takes years to erase an EPROM. All UV erasable parts have a quartz windowed ceramic package that allows exposure with UV light. Reading a programmable device and comparing its contents to the desired pattern for that device. This is a go/no-go test – it does not report what the discrepancies are. See also: compare. The number of output pins that a memory device has. The most common size for EPROMs is byte wide (8 bits) and “word” wide, or 16 bits. It can also refer to the aggregate width of several memory devices used in a set.

119

Programador PIC JDM PLUS Programador de PICs, memorias EEPROM I2C y memorias EEPROM MicroWire (zócalo incorporado)

RdSS Equipos Electrónicos

Programador PIC JDM PLUS AR Rev1.05 / SC – Mayo 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Tabla de contenidos Características del Programador PIC JDM PLUS................................................ 3 Listado de dispositivos soportados por el Programador PIC JDM PLUS ................ 3 Conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)............................................................................ 4 Zócalo MicroWire ......................................................................................... 4 Cómo colocar los PICs y memorias en los zócalos ............................................ 4 Software de programación ............................................................................ 6 Configuración del IC-Prog ............................................................................. 6 Configuración del WinPic800 ......................................................................... 7 Configuración del PonyProg2000.................................................................... 7 Configuración del Win Pic DL4YHF's PIC Programmer for Windows ..................... 7 Circuito para memorias 93CXX, 59CXX y 35CXX usando el conector ICSP ........... 9 Precauciones y advertencias ....................................................................... 10 Dimensiones ............................................................................................. 11

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 2

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Programador PIC JDM PLUS Características del programador PIC JDM PLUS • Soporta PICs de 8, 18, 28 y 40 pines de programación serial • Soporta Memorias EEPROM I2C • Soporta Memorias MicroWire de las líneas 93C, 59C y 35C (zócalo incluido) • Posee conector de programación IN-Circuit (ICSP) y led de actividad • Conexión directa a PC a través del puerto serie • No necesita alimentación externa, la toma desde el mismo puerto de la PC • Fabricado con materiales de primera calidad • No es compatible con adaptadores USB – serie o similares • No soporta dispositivos de programación paralela • Debido a la baja potencia presente en los puertos de las notebooks puede que este programador no funcione en ellas

Listado de Memorias y Microcontroladores PIC soportados por el Programador PIC JDM PLUS

I2C

24C01A, 24C02, 24C04, 24C08, 24C16, 24C32, 24C64, 24C65, 24C128, 24C256, 24C512, PCF8572, 8572, PCF8582, 8582, PCF8592, 8592, SDA2506, SDA2516, SDA2526, SDA2546, SDA2586, SDA3506, SDA3516, SDA3526, 4C016, GRS-003, GRN-004, GRN-008, GRX-006, GRX-007, KKZ06F, BAW658049, BAW57452, M8571, X24C01, 24LC21

MicroWire

93C06, 93C14, 93C46, 93C56, 93C57, 93C66, 93C76, 93C86, 59C11, 59C13, 59C22, CAT35C102, CAT35C104, CAT35C108

Memorias EEPROM

12C 12CE

12CE518, 12CE519, 12CE673, 12CE674

12F

12F629, 12F675

16C

16C433, 16C61, 16C62, 16C62A, 16C62B, 16C63, 16C63A, 16C64, 16C64A, 16C65, 16C65A, 16C65B, 16C66, 16C67, 16C71, 16C72, 16C72A, 16C73, 16C73A, 16C73B, 16C76, 16C77, 16C505, 16C620, 16C620A, 16C621, 16C621A, 16C622, 16C622A, 16C710, 16C711, 16C712, 16C715, 16C716, 16C717, 16C745, 16C765, 16C770, 16C771, 16C773, 16C774, 16C781, 16C782, 16C923, 16C924

Microcontroladores PIC 16CE

16F

18F

RdSS 2007

12C508, 12C508A, 12C509, 12C509A, 12C671, 12C672

16CE623, 16CE624, 16CE625 16F73, 16F74, 16F76, 16F77, 16F83, 16F84, 16F84A, 16F627, 16F628, 16F630, 16F676, 16F818, 16F819, 16F870, 16F871, 16F872, 16F873, 16F873A, 16F874, 16F874A, 16F876, 16F876A, 16F877, 16F877A 18F242, 18F248, 18F252, 18F258, 18F442, 18F448, 18F452, 18F458, 18F1220, 18F1320, 18F2220, 18F2320, 18F2439, 18F2455, , 18F2539, 18F2550, 18F4220, 18F4320, 18F4439, 18F4455, 18F4539, 18F4550, 18F6620, 18F6720, 18F8620, 18F8720

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 3

Programador PIC JDM PLUS En caso de utilizar un cable de extensión para conectar el programador a la PC, este debe ser del tipo apantallado para evitar errores de programación. El cable es del tipo DB9 Macho a DB9 Hembra. En caso de querer fabricarlo la configuración es pin a pin, uno a uno (Ej.: DB9H pin 1 con DB9M pin1). Este cable se puede conseguir en cualquier casa de computación o electrónica.

Conector IN-Circuit (ICSP) La siguiente figura muestra la descripción de cada pin del conector IN-Circuit (ICSP) que se encuentra en la placa (ver precauciones y advertencias):

Zócalo para memorias MicroWire

Cómo colocar los PICs y las memorias en los zócalos A continuación se detalla como se colocan en su correcta posición los PICs y las memorias en el programador PIC JDM PLUS. Respete las etiquetas de indicación, cada tipo de PIC o memoria tiene un lugar determinado en el programador. Observe el pin 1 correspondiente de cada PIC y memoria. Vea las precauciones y advertencias. En un microcontrolador PIC de 8 pines

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 4

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

En un microcontrolador PIC de 18 pines

En un microcontrolador PIC de 28 pines

En un microcontrolador PIC de 40 pines

En una memoria EEPROM I2C de la línea 24CXX o equivalentes

En una memoria EEPROM MicroWire de las líneas 93CXX, 59CXX, 35CXXX o equivalentes

El zócalo para memorias del tipo MicroWire SOLO funciona con el programa IC-Prog, no lo hace con PonyProg

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 5

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Software de programación Este programador es compatible con cualquier software de programación que permita la utilización de programadores con conexión a puerto serie del tipo JDM. A continuación se detalla la configuración de los software de programación más usados. Aunque los más recomendados para utilizar con el programador son el ICProg y el WinPic800 debido a que son los que pueden programar una mayor cantidad de dispositivos.

Configuración del IC-Prog La siguiente imagen corresponde a la configuración básica para Windows:

Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.ic-prog.com/

La próxima imagen corresponde a la configuración extendida para Windows NT, Windows 2000 y Windows XP. En caso de usar otra versión de Windows la configuración puede variar. Si el programador se comporta de forma extraña pruebe cambiar la interfaz y/o el valor del Retardo I/O. Para usar correctamente el programador JDM bajo estas versiones de Windows debe habilitar la opción “Habilitar Driver NT/2000/XP” para que el programa cargue los controladores correspondientes:

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 6

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Configuración del WinPic800

Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.winpic800.com/

Configuración del PonyProg2000

Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.lancos.com/

Configuración del WIN PIC de DL4YHF's PIC Programmer for Windows La siguiente imagen corresponde a la configuración de este software de programación para Windows, si bien esta diseñado para funcionar sobre las versiones más recientes de Windows, hay reportes de que en algunos equipos dicho software presenta errores al querer programar algunos dispositivos. Recomendamos utilizar este programador solamente en casos donde sea indispensable su uso. El tipo de interfaz a utilizar es la del “Programador COM84 para puerto serie”, y luego hacer una comprobación de la correcta instalación de

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 7

Programador PIC JDM PLUS este programador presionando el botón denominado “¡Inicializar!”. Si comprobación es correcta ya puede utilizar este programa.

esta

Para nuevas versiones o mayor información ver http://www.qsl.net/dl4yhf

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 8

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Circuito auxiliar para memorias 93CXX, 59CXX y 35CXX usando el conector para conexión In-Circuit (ICSP) Para realizar este práctico circuito, necesita sólo dos componentes listados en el circuito dado a continuación.

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 9

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Precauciones y advertencias Las siguientes aclaraciones deben ser tenidas en cuenta a la hora de utilizar este programador: Los PIC’s son sensibles a las ESD (Descargas electrostáticas), asegúrese de haberse descargado usted y su entorno previamente a retirar el chip de su envoltorio protector. Verifique que todos los pines se alinean correctamente en el zócalo del programador y luego inserte el chip cuidadosamente (las patitas del chip se rompen fácilmente). Si realiza tareas de desarrollo que implican frecuentes reprogramaciones puede ser buena idea utilizar un zócalo de transporte para proteger al PIC. Asegúrese que el programador se encuentra correctamente configurado según las recomendaciones para el dispositivo a programar. Tenga cuidado en donde deja apoyado el programador ya que el contacto con superficies metálicas pueden dañar momentánea o permanentemente al programador y/o puerto de la PC Nunca coloque o quite un dispositivo del zócalo del programador mientras se esté programando o leyendo, ni cuando el led de actividad esté encendido. Tampoco coloque varios dispositivos a la vez para programar. Al utilizar el conector IN-Circuit, tenga en cuenta que en el circuito en donde se encuentra el microcontrolador, el pin de MCLR NO DEBE estar conectado directamente a VCC ya que el programador eleva la señal de MCLR hasta los 13V para entrar en modo de programación. Si no verifica esto puede dañar momentánea o permanentemente al programador y/o microcontrolador. No trate de utilizar el programador en dispositivos que no están en la lista antes dicha; el uso incorrecto puede ocasionar un daño permanente en el programador y/o dispositivo. Esta placa no es apta para el uso en equipos que se utilicen como soportes de vida, ni ninguna otra actividad que implique la confianza total en este equipo. El fabricante del programador NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE por el mal uso que el usuario pudiera darle, como así también por los daños ocasionados por este en otros equipos a los que estuviese conectado (Ej.: PC, electrodomésticos, etc.). El usuario además da fe de que sabe utilizarlo de acuerdo a lo dicho en esta hoja de datos. La utilización del programador implica la aceptación de estas pautas. Ante cualquier duda, por mínima que sea, comuníquese con nosotros.

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 10

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Dimensiones Ancho ................................................................................................ 37 mm Largo ............................................................................................... 123 mm Alto ................................................................................................... 14 mm Peso ......................................................................................................90 g

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC – Página 11

Engineering Technical Laboratory

Rev 2

ETLUNIPROG control software Win98/Win2000/WinXP

! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! !

ODESSA 2002

Microprocessor Tools

1.1 What You’ll Need The following section describe items that are you need to use ETL programming tools with ETLUNIPROG control software .

Hardware checklist Programmer boards : -MC68HC05B6 board * -MC68HC705B16 board* -MC68HC05L28 board* -MC68HC11E9 board* -MC68HC11PA8 board* -TMS370Cx5x,Cx6x board* -TMS375C006 board*

Software checklist OS -MS-Windows ( Win98, Win2000, WinXP) Software tool -ETLUNIPROG software

1.2 Installing the ETLUNIPROG software The ETLUNIPROG software designed for support early ETL programming tools that arranged the parts of MS-DOS drivers for each separated board now combine into one software shell. To install the ETLUNIPROG software, follow these steps: 1) Insert ETL CD into your CD-ROM drive ** 2) Close all running application 3) Follow prompts to install software to your hard drive 4) Restart your PC when installation completed (optimal)

1.3 Starting the ETLUNIPROG software The software used communicating with boards (listed above). The ETLUNIPROG user interface includes simple controls to activate boards and modes of operate. After start the software click left mouse button on “Device” button and select a programming board , click on “radio” button , next step to set correct device from right side window. So make three simple steps for Board/IC selection : 1 - Click device button; 2 - Click Board; 3 - Confirm device (See Figure 1) When device is selected you should see a message , that indicate selected device (according to supported board) into the message bar. For example MC68HC705B16 board Already selected (See figure 2). *NOTE1: Programming boards description see Appendix 1 **NOTE2: Download etluniprog .exe from http://www.etlweb.com

-1-

STEP1 STEP2

STEP3

Figure 1 (Select Device)

Board/IC Selected

All control buttons unlocked and ready to operate Figure 2 (MC68HC705 board/IC already selected)

Now software ready to operate with selected board/IC. First of all make sure, that board connected to PC communication port (LPT or Com) and supply power to a target board. Second, choice menu Tools and click on Ports Options menu, to configuring your PC ports (See Figure 4). Change the Port number in case of necessary and set speed control slide to slow position (P II/III ) or middle position (P IV) *** **NOTE3: applied to Normal Bi-directional Printer ports. For any other cases use Port expansion card, it can be connected to any free ISA or PCI slot of your PC. MC68HC05L28 programming board must be connected to free Serial Port (Com1-Com4). -2-

STEP1 STEP2

Figure 4 (Select Port options menu)

Set LPT port number I/O base addr. $03F8 /LPT1/ I/O base addr. $02F8 /LPT2/ Set LPT port speed control

Set Serial port number I/O base addr. $0378 /Com1/ I/O base addr. $0278 /Com2/ Figure 5 (Port settings inset) Now choice Program Sequence or Read Sequence docked panel according with your needs, then press a button to activate control and press Start button to begin operation (See Figure 6)

Docked panel read sequence Activated

Figure 6 (Button activation ) -3-

Figure 7 ( Control buttons) BUTTONS CONTROL MEANING: ERASE - this option erases the EEPROM data from the active device. PROGRAM - this option programs the EEPROM data active device with the contents of the data array (Dump Editor). VERIFY - This function compares the EEPROM contents of the active device with the contents of the data array (Dump Editor). If will display an error message and the address if it finds and address where the EEPROM data differs. LOCK - secured device, when the SEC (NOSEC) bit is changed (See Motorola microcontrollers documentation), its new value will have no effect until the next external or power-on reset. UNLOCK - unsecured device. READ - This option reads the EEPROM data active device into the data array (Dump Editor). ATTENTION: Prior to executing commands, you have to select board/IC as active and insert this explore device in the socket. OPERATION CONTROL: See manuals of boards currently using. Default LEDs meaning: YELLOW (continuously)- power supply turned ON. GREEN (flashing) - reading device. RED (flashing) - writing device. USE BREAK OPERATION: For interrupt current operation when operation in progress just deselect Start button than click it to deactivate control. ATTENTION: If operation interrupted this may cause to uncontemplated results. MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS: COPY - This function copies a block in memory to a new address. UNDO - As you make changes to the memory buffer, the change.s on the data array highlighted (with RED colour as default). If you choose this option, it will reverse all changes made to the highlighted areas. FIND - search the hex or string value. PASTE - paste the copied data to specified data array. FILL - This option is used to fill a block of data array with a specified value. It needs the starting address, the ending address and the value to be copied into this block of data array. GO TO ADDRESS: go to specified address. SELECT ALL - select all data array contents. -4-

If after start you should see message similar to this one (Figure 8), check next items: 1) Power supply connection is present on target board? 2) Interface cable (LPT or Serial cable) attached to target board or PC? 3) All contacts in the target socket is good? 4) Explored IC not damaged?

Figure 8 (Error message) If after start you should see massage about successful, when operation completed, save data into a file or make changes in the data array (Dump Editor ) according with your needs. Than click Dump Editor button:

1

2

3 4 5 6 Figure 9 (Common buttons meaning)

Common buttons meaning: 1 - Dump Editor button 2 - Description button 3 - Open file button 4 - Save button 5 - Print button 6 - Help button (This manual) The data array included all 64K address space (it reserved for future needs) from $0000 to $FFFF. In case of necessary to load dump contents less, than specified please use offset control function. For example: there is a need to load into data array 256 bytes file , that started from address $0000 for EEPROM data location of MC68HC705B16 microcontroller, that located from $0100 to $01FF. So follow next steps: Click Open file button (see figure 9), -5-

00000000 38 67 0C 75 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000010 01 12 01 26 01 6A 01 54 01 30 01 74 01 94 00 00 00000020 01 8E 01 54 01 6A 01 98 01 04 01 20 01 30 00 00 00000030 01 94 01 92 00 88 00 56 00 88 01 92 01 92 00 05 00000040 01 8E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00000050 00 00 46 41 3C 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000060 55 AA 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000070 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000080 8B 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00000090 8B 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000000A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000000C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 000000D0 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 12 34 000000E0 56 57 00 61 6C 70 68 61 00 34 AA 55 5A A5 00 00 000000F0 01 10 92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 0E 15 0E

Figure 10 (Example file) then disable “Load Entry File” flag, enter addresses and click OK button Now you can find loaded data into address array according with adjusted offset value into required address space.

Figure 11 (Offset settings and result array)

2.0 Maintenance of the ETLUNIPROG software For any troubles, such as disabling string window, progress bar and etc., click Tool panel and chose ”Reset To Default” button then click it to restore all previous correct settings. To uninstall the ETLUNIPROG software tool, click Icon My Computer, then click Control Panel and ADD/REMOVE programs button and remove it in case of necessary. -6-

APPENDIX 1: MC68HC705B16 PROG. BOARD. Supported devices: MC68HC05B6, MC68HC05B8, MC68HC05B16, MC68HC05B32, MC68HC705B16, MC68HC705B32, MC68HC05X16, MC68HC05X32, MC68HC705X16 MC68HC05B6 PROG. BOARD. Supported devices:MC68HC05B6, MC68HC05B8, MC68HC05B16, MC68HC05B32

MC68HC11PA8 PROG. BOARD. Supported devices: MC68HC11PA8, MC68HC11KA4, MC68HC11KA1, MC68HC11PA2

MC68HC05L28 PROG. BOARD. Supported device: MC68HC05L28

TMS375C006 PROG. BOARD. Supported devices: TMS375C006, TMP375C706

TMS370Cx5X PROG. BOARD. Supported devices: TMS370C756(A), TMS370C758(A)

-7 -

Errata (MC68HC11PA8 Prog. Board):

When you using MC68HC11PA8 programming board with ETLUNIPROG software , click ERASE button for every WRITE procedure. (Applied to all supported devices MC68HC11KA1, MC68HC11KA4, MC68HC11PA8, MC68HC11P2). ATTENTION: DON’T click LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for MCU’s with modify bootstrap loader (for example mask set 0D58J, 1D58J) - this modes can damage CONFIG register data or data will be lost. After click Start button you should see message similar to this one:

Click No for cancel CONFIG register programming.

-8-

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

16 di 49

BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9

BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9 Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Bosch nella parte inferiore della centralina BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9 Procedure of recognition and connection to the Bosch EDC16/EDC16+/ME9 ECUs Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. The pads are situated in all the Bosch ECU in the inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Di queste 14 piazzole noi utilizzeremo le prime 10 a sinistra.

Of those 14 pads we’ll use the first 10 at left.

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

17 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Saldatura degli strip Stagnare solo ed esclusivamente il quinto pad partendo da sinistra della prima fila.

Weld exclusively the fifth pad from left of the first line.

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

18 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

19 di 49

Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la saldatura partendo dalla piazzola precedentemente stagnata. Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins. Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste.

Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated. Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Ripetere l’intera procedura per il secondo strip cercando di mantenere un corretto allineamento.

Repeat the whole procedure for the second strip wanting to maintain a correct alignment

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

20 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo – User manual

pag.

21 di 49

Collegamento del connettore La banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra ( piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento. Connector’s connection The colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo – User manual

pag.

22 di 49

DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong

DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline DELPHI nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralina Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la .Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins. Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste. Vedi procedura EDC16 In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash del Micro DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong Procedure of recognition and connection to the DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. The pads are situated in all the DELPHI ECU in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture. Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated. Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks. (see EDC16 description ) In this Ecu the Maps are into the Microprocessor Flash Memory

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

23 di 49

Collegare l’adattatore “DELPHI-MOTOROLA” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1. Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra (piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the “DELPHI-MOTOROLA” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 . Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

24 di 49

Alimentazione: Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore. Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare l’alimentazione come descritto PIN 1 GND PIN 4 +12Vcc Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso. Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply: For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press +12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture PIN 1 GND PIN 4 +12Vcc Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo – User manual

pag.

25 di 49

MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki

MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline MARELLI nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralina MJET In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash del Micro MJET+ M58W016 In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash M58W016 MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki Procedure of recognition and connection to MARELLI MJET Fiat/Opel/Suzuki Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. The pads are situated in all the MARELLI ECU in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture. MJET In this Ecu the Maps are inside the Microprocessor Flash Memory MJET+ M58W016 In this Ecu the Maps are inside the M58W016 Flash Memory

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo – User manual

MJET

Rimuovere la resistenza da 0 ohm come indicato e saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 6 pins ) Non è necessario risaldare la resistenza dopo l’operazione.

Remove the 0 ohm resistor and weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins ) It’s not necessary ti put in place again the 0 ohm resistor after the reprogram operations.

MJET+ M58W016

pag.

26 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

27 di 49

Collegare l’adattatore “MARELLI MJET” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1. Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra (piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the “MARELLI” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 . Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

28 di 49

Alimentazione: Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore. Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare l’alimentazione come descritto PIN 1 GND PIN 50,23 +12Vcc Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso. Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply: For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press +12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture PIN 1 GND PIN 50,23 +12Vcc Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

29 di 49

SIEMENS 5WS-803(A) Volvo s40v50 2.0d/Ford C.Max 2.0d/ Peugeot 2.0 Hdi FAP

SIEMENS 5WS Volvo s40v50 2.0d/Ford C.Max 2.0d/ Peugeot 2.0 Hdi FAP Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Siemens 5WS nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralina. In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute all’interno della flash del Micro ( solo sid803 con 29bl803) SIEMENS 5WS Volvo s40v50 2.0d/Ford C.Max 2.0d/ Peugeot 2.0 Hdi FAP Procedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WS Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. The pads are situated in all the Siemens 5WS in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture. In this Ecu the Maps are into the Microprocessor Flash Memory ( only sid803 with 29bl803 )

MPCProg 5xx

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

Manuale operativo – User manual

Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )

Weld the two 1.27” pins strips.

(2 X 5 pins )

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

30 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

31 di 49

Collegare l’adattatore “SIEMENS” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1. Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra (piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the “SIEMENS” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 . Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

32 di 49

Alimentazione: Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore. Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare l’alimentazione come descritto Connettore 2 PIN G4 +12Vcc Connettore 3 PIN C3 +12Vcc PIN H4 GND Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso. Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply: For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press +12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture Connector 2 PIN G4 +12Vcc Connector 3 PIN C3 +12Vcc PIN H4 GND Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo – User manual

pag.

33 di 49

SIEMENS 5WK MS45 BMW Z4

SIEMENS 5WK MS45 BMW Z4 Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Siemens 5WK MS45 nella parte centrale sinistra della centralina Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )

SIEMENS 5WK MS45 BMW Z4 Procedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WK MS45 Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. The pads are situated in all the Siemens 5WK MS45 in the cetral left side of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture. Weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

34 di 49

Collegare l’adattatore “SIEMENS” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1. Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra (piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the “SIEMENS” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 . Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

35 di 49

Alimentazione: Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore. Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.

Power supply: For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press +12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

36 di 49

SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7D

SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7D Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7D Procedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WS-201 Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.

MPCProg 5xx

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

Manuale operativo – User manual

Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )

Weld the two 1.27” pins strips.

(2 X 5 pins )

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

37 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

38 di 49

Collegare l’adattatore “SIEMENS” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1. Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra (piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the “SIEMENS” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 . Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

39 di 49

Alimentazione: Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore. Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare l’alimentazione come descritto Connettore 3 PIN K4 +12Vcc PIN K3 +12Vcc PIN M1 GND Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso. Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply: For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press +12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture Connettor 3 PIN K4 +12Vcc PIN K3 +12Vcc PIN M1 GND Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

Bosch ME9.7 Mercedes Benz SLK 350

Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27”. (2 X 5 pins )

Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. Weld the two 1.27” pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )

40 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

41 di 49

Collegare l’adattatore “Marelli” come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n°1. Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra (piazzola uno ) In caso di errore è possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina. CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the “Marelli” socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n°1 . Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one) In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU. CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

42 di 49

Alimentazione: Per questa centralina non è necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore. Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare l’alimentazione come descritto Connettore Destro PIN 15 +12Vcc PIN 16 +12Vcc PIN 2 GND Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare l’applicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nell’ordine inverso. Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply: For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press +12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture PIN 15 +12Vcc PIN 16 +12Vcc PIN 2 GND Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

43 di 49

BOSCH BMSK BMW MOTORCYCLE

Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore. Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Bosch nella parte inferiore della centralina Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la saldatura partendo dalla piazzola precedentemente stagnata. Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins. Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste.

Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector. The pads are situated in all the Bosch ECU in the inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture. Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated. Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

SIEMENS MSV70 BMW

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

44 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

SIEMENS MSS65 BMW

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

45 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Siemens SIM266 Mercedes

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

46 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

SIEMENS PPD1.1 VAG

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

47 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

48 di 49

CONTRATTO DI LICENZA D'USO E GARANZIA DEL SOFTWARE

LICENZA PER IL PRODOTTO SOFTWARE: Il Prodotto è protetto dalle leggi e dai trattati sulla proprietà intellettuale. Il Prodotto viene concesso in licenza d'uso non esclusiva, con il vincolo della non cessione a terzi, non viene venduto.

1. CONCESSIONE DI LICENZA. In questo articolo del Contratto, sono descritti i diritti generali dell'Utente relativi all'installazione e all'utilizzo del Prodotto. I diritti di licenza descritti nel presente articolo sono soggetti a tutte le altre condizioni del presente Contratto.

1.1 Proprietà - Divieto di cessione. Il Prodotto è e rimane di nostra esclusiva proprietà , fatto quindi espresso divieto all'Utente di venderlo, darlo in licenza o sub-licenza, distribuirlo o cederlo a terzi o comunque di consentirne l'uso da parte di terzi a titolo oneroso.

1.2 Divieto di modifica. L'Utente si obbliga a proteggere i diritti di proprietà, in particolare si obbliga a non modificare, alterare o aggiungere parti al Prodotto, né ad incorporarlo in tutto od in parte in altri programmi.

2. DESCRIZIONE DI ALTRI DIRITTI E RESTRIZIONI

2.1 Attivazione Software. Al fine di esercitare i propri diritti sul Prodotto Software, quali illustrati nel presente contratto, l'Utente riceve una chiave di abilitazione hardware. La perdita della stessa può portare l’utente a non poter più esercitare diritti sul prodotto.

2.2 Trattamento dei dati personali. La registrazione dei dati avviene sulla base e nel rispetto delle leggi applicabili sulla tutela delle persone e di altri soggetti rispetto al trattamento dei dati personali.

2.3 Protezione delle Copie. Il Prodotto Software potrebbe contenere una tecnologia di protezione delle copie per impedire la duplicazione non autorizzata del Prodotto Software oppure potrà richiedere il supporto originale per l'utilizzo del Prodotto Software nel Dispositivo. È illegale effettuare copie non autorizzate del Prodotto Software oppure eludere la tecnologia di protezione delle copie contenuta nel Prodotto Software.

2.4 Restrizioni sulla Decodificazione, sulla Decompilazione e sul Disassemblaggio. E' fatto divieto all'Utente di decodificare, decompilare o disassemblare il Prodotto,fatto salvo quanto espressamente consentito da disposizioni di legge vigente in materia.

2.5 Separazione di Componenti. Il Prodotto è concesso in licenza come un prodotto unitario. Le sue singole parti componenti non potranno essere separate per l'utilizzo su più di un Dispositivo a meno che ciò non sia espressamente autorizzato nel presente Contratto o dalle disposizioni di legge vigente.

2.6 Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti. In alcuni casi, potrà fornire all'Utente un servizio supporto tecnico clienti relativo al Prodotto ("Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti"). L'utilizzo del Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti è disciplinato dalle politiche e dai nostri programmi.

2.7 Trasferimento del Software. E' fatto divieto al licenziatario iniziale del Prodotto Software di trasferire il presente Contratto e il Prodotto Software sia a titolo oneroso che gratuito.

2.8 Durata. Il presente contratto ha una durata indeterminata, dando facoltà ad entrambe le parti di recedere in qualsiasi momento senza obbligo di preavviso.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx Manuale operativo – User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005 pag.

49 di 49

3. DIRITTI SULLA PROPRIETÀ INTELLETTUALE. 3.1 Diritti. La titolarità e i diritti sulla proprietà intellettuale relativi al Prodotto (inclusi, in via esemplificativa, ogni immagine, fotografia, animazione, video, audio, musica, testo, "applet", ecc. integrati al Prodotto Software), il materiale stampato accluso e qualsiasi copia del Prodotto, sono di nostra proprietà . L'Utente non potrà riprodurre il materiale stampato accluso al Prodotto. Il Cliente assicurerà la Sua piena collaborazione, laddove vi fosse necessità, al fine di far constatare la titolarità dei nostri diritti , adempiendo a tutti gli eventuali opportuni incombenti per la migliore tutela degli stessi.

4. LIMITAZIONI DI RESPONSABILITA'. 4.1 Limitazione di responsabilità. NELLA MISURA MASSIMA CONSENTITA DALLA LEGGE IN VIGORE, IN NESSUN CASO SAREMO RESPONSABILI PER GLI EVENTUALI DANNI SPECIALI, ACCIDENTALI, DIRETTI O INDIRETTI (INCLUSI, SENZA LIMITAZIONI, IL DANNO PER LA PERDITA O MANCATO GUADAGNO, INTERRUZIONE DELL'ATTIVITA', PERDITA DI INFORMAZIONI O ALTRE PERDITE ECONOMICHE) DERIVANTI DALL'USO DEL PRODOTTO O DAL SUO MANCATO UTILIZZO OVVERO DALLA FORNITURA O DALLA MANCATA FORNITURA DEL SERVIZIO DI SUPPORTO TECNICO, ANCHE NEL CASO , LA NOSTRA RESPONSABILITA' COMPLESSIVA AI SENSI DEL PRESENTE CONTRATTO SARA' LIMITATA ALL'IMPORTO MAGGIORE TRA QUELLO EFFETTIVAMENTE PAGATO PER IL PRODOTTO E LA SOMMA EQUIVALENTE A CINQUE (5) EURO NELLA VALUTA LOCALE.

SCHEDA ELIMINAZIONE CODE

AUDI

0 261 204 818

AUDI A6 1.8 TURBO

ELIMINAZIONE TOTALE

Aprire la centralina rimuovendo il coperchio tramite le 4 viti poste nella parte inferiore.

Localizzare la memoria seriale 24C04 come evidenziato nella figura accanto.

Riprogrammare la memoria con il file allegato Rispettare il riferimento al PIN 1 come indicato in figura per non danneggiare la memoria.

Ultimo aggiornamento : 01/08/02

Proprieta' esclusiva SEA ogni riproduzione totale o parziale e' vietata.

Pagina 1 di 1

LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE CLIO 2002-> YAHOO – AUTENTIQUE Vista del immo box:

Desoldar la EEPROM ( 93c66 ) y limpiar la superficie con limpia contacto ( alcohol isopropilico ) para sacar la capa protectora.

Una vez desoldada la Eeprom colocarla en pinza de lactura y seleccionar con el pulsador del programador hasta llegar a la Posición 93xxxx. Abrir el programa PONY-PROGRAM 1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9366 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

La ubicación de los 6 pares para el CLIO YAHOO ( ESTÁNDAR )

Mediante las cordenadas indicadas a continuación se debera armar el Codigo de 12 digitos del vehiculo. LECTURA DE DUMP CLIO YAHOO MANUAL PONY 93C66

MANUAL

1 2 3 4 5 6

FILA 110 FILA 170 FILA 190 FILA 110 FILA 190 FILA 170

CASILLERO 13 CASILLERO 14 CASILLERO 5 CASILLERO 12 CASILLERO 4 CASILLERO 13

La ubicación de los 6 pares para el CLIO AUTENTIQUE ( FULL) FULL 1 2 3 4 5 6

FILA 120 FILA 180 FILA 1A0 FILA 120 FILA 1A0 FILA 180

CASILLERO 7 CASILLERO 10 CASILLERO 7 CASILLERO 6 CASILLERO 6 CASILLERO 9

Immo de derby y otros vehículos, como la eurovan, etc, para leerlo se debe de escoger con el boton derecho del Vag-pin el immo tipo derby y colocar el Sw de la parte de abajo hacia el lado derecho, si no marcara error en pinzas.

INMO VOLKSWAGEN GOL – SAVEIRO – FOX – SURAN – SANTANA - QUANTUM Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria: 93xxxx en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa. Explicación en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / MICROWIRE Eeprom / 93c56 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0018:

0018: 0000 0000 5632 394B 4F53 5441 4C09

0A3D

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

090A

PASARLO A DECIMAL

2314

PIN CODE

Explicación en el software PONY-PROG

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9356 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 000030:

30 )

00 00 00 00 56 32 39 48 - 4F 53 54 41 4C 09

0A 3D

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

090A 2314

PASARLO A DECIMAL PIN CODE

Los ARCHIVOS que se encuentra dentro de esta carpeta corresponden A un DUMPS de IMMOs virginizados para el Programa IC-PROG: KOSTAL Para Virginizar el IMMO se debe seleccionar la memoria 93xxxx en el Programador y hacer lo mismo en el software IC-PROG Una vez seleccionada la memoria: IR A ARCHIVO / Abrir archivo Y buscar dentro del CD / Carpetas Varias / VW GOL Kostal El archivo que corresponda al IMMO que se quiera Virginizar

Una vez abierto, conecte el IMMO al programador y seleccione: COMANDO / Programar todo. Ahora el IMMO tendra un nuevo numero de PIN-CODE y estara Virginizado

INMO VOLKSWAGEN POLO VALEO / CADDY VALEO / TRANSPORTER 2001-> Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria: 24xxx en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa. Explicación en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / IC Eeprom / 24c04 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0060:

0060: 00FF 00FF 0000 0003 0024 005F 00D8 000C Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

0CD8 3288

PASARLO A DECIMAL PIN CODE

Explicación en el software PONY-PROG

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / 12C Bus 8bit eeprom / 2404 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 00001B0: 0001B0

FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF - FF FF 00 03 24 5F D8

0C

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

0CD8 3288

PASARLO A DECIMAL PIN CODE

INMO VOLKSWAGEN GOL – SAVEIRO – FOX – SURAN – SANTANA - QUANTUM Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria: 93xxxx en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa. Explicación en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / MICROWIRE Eeprom / 93c56 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0010:

0010: A4E9 5201 22F2 56C3 E9C6 DA00 871D 0061 Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

22C3

PASARLO A DECIMAL

8899

PIN CODE

Explicación en el software PONY-PROG

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9356 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 000020: 000020) A4 E9 52 01 22 F2 56 C3 – E9 C6 DA 00 87 1D 00 61

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

22C3

PASARLO A DECIMAL

8899

PIN CODE

Los ARCHIVOS que se encuentra dentro de esta carpeta corresponden A un DUMPS de IMMOs virginizados para el Programa IC-PROG:

MEGAMOS / DELPHI nafta MEGAMOS / DELPHI diesel Para Virginizar el IMMO se debe seleccionar la memoria 93xxxx en el Programador y hacer lo mismo en el software IC-PROG Una vez seleccionada la memoria: IR A ARCHIVO / Abrir archivo Y buscar dentro del CD / Carpetas Varias / VW GOL Megamos – delphi. ,el archivo que corresponda al IMMO que se quiera Virginizar

Una vez abierto, conecte el IMMO al programador y seleccione: COMANDO / Programar todo. Ahora el IMMO tendra un nuevo numero de PIN-CODE y estara Virginizado

INMOVILISADORES INFORMACION 1} LOS TIPO A SON LOS QUE TIENEN LA MEMORIA LEJOS DEL FILTRO Y SE PINSAN CON EL CAIMAN LOS 2 PINES LATERALES (A MANERA QUE QUEDEN UNIDOS) DE LOS 3 PINES QUE SE ENCUENTRAN JUNTOS EN LA PARTE DE TRASERA DE LA TABLETA

2} LOS TIPO B TIENEN LA MEMORIA DETRÁS DEL FILTRO

3) LOS DE DERBI TIENEN LA MEMORIA EN

POSICION DE COLORES PARA LA PINZA DE POINTER. LA MARCA ESTÁ DEL LADO DEL COLOR VERDE Y DEL ROJO

3} LAS REFERENCIAS PARA PINSAR LAS MEMORIA SON: LAS 2 MARCAS QUE TIENE LA PINSA VAN HACIA EL PUNTO QUE TIENE LA MEMORIA O LEYENDO EL GRABADO DE LAS LETRAS LAS MARCAS VAN A LA IZQUIERDA NO ENCENDER ANTES DE PINZAR Y APAGAR ANTES DE DESPINZAR O LA MEMORIA SE BORRARÁ OJO:

4} ATOS, MEMORIA 95040 PARA ABRIR BUFER SE PONE 25XX POSICIONES DEL NUMERO 10--42 37 92 20--42 37 92 30--42 37 92

5} PLATINA, RENAULT MEMORIA 93C66 POSICIONES DE LOS NÚMEROS LEER A (8 o 16) BITS 10C 10D 10E 10F 110 111

117 116 119 118 10B 10A

10D 17C 195 10A 192 17D

10C 17E 194 10B 193 17C

127 188 1A7 124 1A4 189

EL CABLE CAFÉ A LA REFERENCIA PINTADA DE AMARILLO 6} NÚMERO DEL ESCANER: T CODE 635434

INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA LECTURA DEL DUMP DEL DECODIFICADOR RENAULT CLIO 2 1998 / 2001 - KANGOO - MASTER TWINGO 2000-> MAGANE 4 PTAS 2004 -> Vista del decodificador

Abrir la caja del decodificador con cuidado de no lastimar la plaqueta

Se debe desoldar la memoria 93c46 de la plaqueta y colocar en la pinza de lectura. Abrir el programa PONY – PROG y seleccionar la la siguiente memoria:

Dispositivo / microwire16 Eeprom / 9346

Realizar la lectura y guardar el archivo con la Extensión .BIN

Una vez Guardado, enviar el archivo por correo electronico a: [email protected] y le sera devuelto los 32 digitos del transponder de ese decodificador.

INMO PEUGEOT 106 / CITROEN SAXO PARTNER HASTA 2000 / BERLINGO HASTA 2000 Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria: 93XXXX en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa. Explicación en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / Microwire Eeprom / 93c57 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra al FINAL de la LINEA 0008: 0008: 009F 9F03 0303 0350 5055 5558 5838 3819 Y.. PUX8 .

Peugeot 206 Procedimiento para REMAPEAR la computadora de injeccion Peugeot 206 nafta modelo 1997 – 2002 1.6 Computadora BOSH MP 7.2

1 Saque los tornillos y la tapa de la computadora 2 Sacar la plaqueta y ubicar la Eeprom 24c02 donde se aloja El codigo a Remapear

Para poder REMAPEAR la Eeprom se debe “DESOLDAR” la memoria 24c02 Conectar la memoria a la Pinza de lectura y abrir El programa IC Prog / seleccionar:

1 Dispositivo / IC Eeprom / 24c02 2 Ir a Archivo / Abrir Archivo y buscar dentro de la carpeta PEUGEOT 206 el Archivo “peugeot 206 bosh mp72 remapeo.hex” 3 Una vez cargado en la pantalla el DUMP Presionar el boton de grabar:

Una vez grabada la Eeprom, soldar la memoria en la plaqueta, armar la computadora y reconectar la ECU al auto ( no es necesario cortar ningun cable ni pin ) El auto dara arranque sin necesidad de transponder y no perdera la información si se desconecta la bateria.

LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE ALARMA GM VECTRA 1998-> Vista de la central de ALARMA:

Ubicación de la Eeprom ( 93lc46 ) donde se aloja el codigo

Antes de leer la Memoria, se debe puentear el cristal, como se indica En el siguiente grafico.

La lectura del pin code se debe realizar mediante el: PONY PROGRAM

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9346 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE.

Ejemplo:

Si la lectura de la Eeprom se hizo de forma correcta, en la columna Final ( numeros color ROSADO ) se debera leer el numero Completo De chasis del vehiculo:

El codigo en este Ejemplo se encuentra en la LINEA 000070:

7155

PIN CODE

LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE GM BLAZER / S-10 Vista del immo box:

1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / IC Eeprom / 24c04 2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres ) Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN. Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0138:

0138: 00CA 0013 00FF 00FF 00F7 0060 0007 0002

6007

PIN CODE

Untitled Document

« BACK

Airbag When an explosion occurs in an airbag or the SRS light is turned on accidentally, commonly the airbag controller should be replaced since the traditional tools cannot clean out the trouble code. Actually, the controller can be used normally again after cleaning the trouble code under the condition that there is no damage to the controllers hardware. With Tech2 this trouble codes like this:

With PINReader this trouble codes like this:

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (1 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49

Untitled Document

After “Clear Crash Codes” with PINReader :

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (2 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49

Untitled Document

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (3 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49

EURO LECTOR II VERSION 1.2

SI SU PROBLEMA ES LEER UN CODIGO CON EL EURO LECTOR SOLO ES UN JUEGO

MANUAL

POINTER SEGURO

TORNILLOS SEGURO

TAPA DE FUSIBLES

TORNILLOS

LUPO SEGURO

Seleccione opción Megamos

LADO ROJO IZQUIERDO

PUENTE SOLO PARA MEGAMOS

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo dañado.

Pointer Megamos

Lectura exitosa.

Seleccione opción Kostal

LADO ROJO IZQUIERDO

Pointer Kostal

NOTA: La tableta puede tener un baño de silicón donde puede experimentar un mal contacto con la pinza, usted puede retirarlo sin dañar la tableta y la memoria con un limpiador especial en aerosol y ayudado con un cepillo dental, una vez que usted aplico el aerosol usted cepilla hasta retirar la capa de silicón.

DERBY Y DERBY VAN

TORNILLOS

Seleccione opción Derby

LADO ROJO IZQUIERDO

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo dañado.

Lectura exitosa.

SHARAN TORNILLOS TORX 20 LADO IZQ Y DER

JALE HACIA A USTED.

TORNILLOS

VISTA DE LOS CONECTORES. !DESCONECTARLOS¡

TORNILLOS DEL INMO.

LADO ROJO IZQUIERDO DE LA PINZA

Seleccione opción Derby

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo dañado.

Lectura exitosa.

ATOS

TORNILLOS

VISTA LADO DER. DEL COPILOTO

Seleccione opción Atos

LADO ROJO IZQUIERDO

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo dañado.

Lectura exitosa.

NOTA: La tableta puede tener un baño de silicón donde puede experimentar un mal contacto con la pinza, usted puede retirarlo sin dañar la tableta y la memoria con un limpiador especial en aerosol y ayudado con un cepillo dental, una vez que usted aplico el aerosol usted cepilla hasta retirar la capa de silicón.

PLATINA Y CLIO II (NO SPORT 2 PUERTAS) VISTA IZQ ARRIBA DE LOS PEDALES SOLO PRESIONAR PARA RETIRAR

Seleccione opción Platina o Clio II

LADO ROJO IZQUIERDO

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo dañado.

Lectura exitosa.

NOTA: La tableta puede tener un baño de silicón donde puede experimentar un mal contacto con la pinza, usted puede retirarlo sin dañar la tableta y la memoria con un limpiador especial en aerosol y ayudado con un cepillo dental, una vez que usted aplico el aerosol usted cepilla hasta retirar la capa de silicón.

CHRYSLER TIPO 1 (1998-2000) Desoldar para poder retirar la tableta y así voltear la tableta y ver la memoria.

ANTENA

Memoria Pinza lado Rojo Izq.

1.Quite la antena que esta al rededor de la columna del encendido. 2.Retire la tapa de la antena, ayudado con un desarmador plano pequeño, para poder quitar los seguros de la tapa. 3.Usted necesita desoldar los conectores que sostienen la antena y l a t a b l e t a . ( N e c e s i t a u s a r u n e x t ra c t o r d e s o l d a d u ra ) 4. Una vez estos desoldados, usted puede retirar la tableta del plástico. 5.De

vuelta

6.Ponga

la

a

pinza

la en

tableta la

y

usted

memoria,

lado

vera rojo

una a

la

memoria. izquierda.

7.Seleccione con el Euro Lector II versión 1.3 Chrysler tipo 1. 8.Usted vera en la pantalla del Euro el VIN de 17 dígitos y el pin 4 dígitos. 300M 99-00, BREEZE 99-00, CHEROKKE 99-00, CIRRUS 99-00, CONCORDE 99-00 GRAND CHEROKEE 99-00,INTREPID 98-00, LHS 99-00, NEON 2000, SEBRING 98-00, WRANGLER 98-00.

NOTA: SI SU PINZA ESTA MAL PUESTA EN TODAS LA OPCIONES EN LA PANTALLA APARECERA UNA ADVERTENCIA COMO: ERROR, VERIFIQUE CONECXION D PINZA Y VUELVA A CONECTAR SU PINZA PERO EN ESTA OCASIÓN BIEN PUESTA. EL EURO LECTOR II NO PUEDE DAÑAR LOS DATOS DE LA MEMORIA, ESTA SOLO LE SUMINISTRA UN VOLTAJE DE 6v A 300mA Y CONTIENE UN REGULADOR QUE SOLO TRABAJA CON ESTE VOLTAJE. COMO INFORMACION LA MEMORIA SOLO SE MODIFICA CON UN VOLTAJE DE 12v DIRECTA. EL EURO LECTOR II SOLO ESTA DISEÑADO PARA LOS VOLTAJES INDICADOS SI EL USUARIO LOS ACCEDE CUALQUIER DAÑO EN EL EQUIPO SERA POR CUENTA Y RIESGO DEL USUARIO.

BOTON 1 SELECCIONAR

BOTON 2 ACEPTA

CONECTOR A PINZA

ALIMENTACION 7.5VDC 300mA (NO IMPORTA LA POLARIDAD)

INTERRUPTOR

LUIS PEREZ VERDIA 6-A COL. DE LOS MAESTROS C.P. 45150 ZAPOPAN JALISCO TALLER. (33) 3126 1761 NEXTEL. (33) 3849 2750 ID. 162609*1 [email protected] www.cerrajeria.com.mx

Printed with ImmoKille 0x000: 0x010: 0x020: 0x030: 0x040: 0x050: 0x060: 0x070: 0x080: 0x090: 0x0A0: 0x0B0: 0x0C0: 0x0D0: 0x0E0: 0x0F0: 0x100: 0x110: 0x120: 0x130: 0x140: 0x150: 0x160: 0x170: 0x180: 0x190: 0x1A0: 0x1B0: 0x1C0: 0x1D0: 0x1E0: 0x1F0:

12 05 05 04 04 07 00 05 05 00 00 05 05 34 34 57 57 00 FF FF 01 01 FF 00 65 00 00 00 00 00 01 01

68 01 01 01 01 02 00 04 04 80 80 07 07 39 39 5A 5A 00 FF FF 01 07 FF 00 65 00 00 00 00 00 02 02

30 02 02 80 80 8A 77 00 00 80 80 83 83 4D 4D 37 37 AE FF FF 48 43 FF 43 03 03 00 00 00 00 00 00

17 00 00 1E 1E 02 0D 00 00 80 80 2B 2B 39 39 5A 5A 0A FF FF 61 22 00 22 88 44 00 00 00 00 00 00

60 1E 1E 34 34 D9 22 42 42 80 80 11 11 32 32 30 30 93 FF FF 72 7B 00 7C BA 32 00 00 00 00 00 00

FE 40 40 28 28 01 0E 00 00 00 00 33 33 4D 4D 41 41 0E FF FF 64 00 00 00 02 01 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 AA AA 0B 00 00 00 00 00 56 56 31 31 34 34 00 FF FF 77 6D 00 65 08 0F 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 B8 B8 00 00 04 04 80 80 57 57 31 31 32 32 00 FF FF 61 04 00 04 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 45 45 18 3F 00 00 00 00 52 52 32 32 32 32 00 FF FF 72 04 00 03 03 43 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 5B 5B 04 03 00 00 80 80 56 56 31 31 38 38 00 FF FF 65 FF 00 44 88 22 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 69 69 90 90 C3 00 01 01 80 80 03 03 39 39 38 38 00 FF FF 20 00 00 A6 40 7B 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF C1 C1 00 00 0E 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 38 38 33 33 00 FF FF 4E 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 03 03 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 56 56 30 30 00 FF FF 6F 80 00 31 0B 6D 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF A5 A5 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 03 03 00 FF FF 00 7F 00 0F 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF CA C9 69 68 8D 04 A9 A9 78 78 9F 9F F2 F2 D0 D0 11 FF FF DF 90 ED 72 F7 09 E6 E5 E4 E3 DF DF

5A FD FD FC FC FD FF FF FF FB FB FD FD FC FC FC FC 11 FF FF FB FC FC FD FC FE FF FF FF FF FF FF

.h0.`þÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿZ [email protected]Á.¥Êý [email protected]Á.¥Éý ..€.4(ª¸E[ ...iü ..€.4(ª¸E[ ...hü ..Š.Ù.....Ã... ý ..w."...?......ÿ ....B.........©ÿ ....B.........©ÿ .€€€€..€.€€ÿ..xû .€€€€..€.€€ÿ..xû ..ƒ+.3VWRV....Ÿý ..ƒ+.3VWRV....Ÿý 49M92M112198V.òü 49M92M112198V.òü WZ7Z0A4228830.Ðü WZ7Z0A4228830.Ðü ..®.“........... ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ..Hardware No.ßû ..C"{.m..ÿ..€ ü ÿÿÿ...........íü ..C"|.e..D¦.1.rý ee.ˆº....ˆ@...÷ü ...D2...C"{.m..þ ..............æÿ ..............åÿ ..............äÿ ..............ãÿ ..............ßÿ ..............ßÿ

Printed with ImmoKille 0x000: 0x010: 0x020: 0x030: 0x040: 0x050: 0x060: 0x070: 0x080: 0x090: 0x0A0: 0x0B0: 0x0C0: 0x0D0: 0x0E0: 0x0F0: 0x100: 0x110: 0x120: 0x130: 0x140: 0x150: 0x160: 0x170: 0x180: 0x190: 0x1A0: 0x1B0: 0x1C0: 0x1D0: 0x1E0: 0x1F0:

12 05 05 04 04 07 00 05 05 00 00 05 05 34 34 57 57 00 FF FF 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01

68 01 01 01 01 02 00 04 04 80 80 07 07 39 39 5A 5A 00 FF FF 01 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 02

30 01 01 80 80 8A 77 00 00 80 80 83 83 4D 4D 37 37 0F FF FF 48 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

17 00 00 1E 1E 02 0D 00 00 80 80 2B 2B 39 39 5A 5A 1B FF FF 61 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

60 1E 1E 34 34 D9 22 42 42 80 80 11 11 32 32 30 30 66 FF FF 72 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FE 40 40 28 28 01 0E 00 00 00 00 33 33 4D 4D 41 41 F9 FF FF 64 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 AA AA 0B 00 00 00 00 00 56 56 31 31 34 34 00 FF FF 77 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 B8 B8 00 00 04 04 80 80 57 57 31 31 32 32 00 FF FF 61 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 45 45 18 3F 00 00 00 00 52 52 32 32 32 32 00 FF FF 72 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 5B 5B 04 03 00 00 80 80 56 56 31 31 38 38 00 FF FF 65 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 69 69 90 90 C3 00 01 01 80 80 03 03 39 39 38 38 00 FF FF 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF C1 C1 00 00 0E 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 38 38 33 33 00 FF FF 4E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF 00 00 03 03 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 56 56 30 30 00 FF FF 6F 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF A5 A5 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 03 03 00 FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

FF CB CA 69 68 8D 04 A9 A9 78 78 9F 9F F2 F2 D0 D0 11 FF FF DF E3 EA E9 E8 E7 E6 E5 E4 E3 DF DF

5A FD FD FC FC FD FF FF FF FB FB FD FD FC FC FC FC 11 FF FF FB FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

.h0.`þÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿZ [email protected]Á.¥Ëý [email protected]Á.¥Êý ..€.4(ª¸E[ ...iü ..€.4(ª¸E[ ...hü ..Š.Ù.....Ã... ý ..w."...?......ÿ ....B.........©ÿ ....B.........©ÿ .€€€€..€.€€ÿ..xû .€€€€..€.€€ÿ..xû ..ƒ+.3VWRV....Ÿý ..ƒ+.3VWRV....Ÿý 49M92M112198V.òü 49M92M112198V.òü WZ7Z0A4228830.Ðü WZ7Z0A4228830.Ðü ....fù.......... ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ..Hardware No.ßû ..............ãÿ ..............êÿ ..............éÿ ..............èÿ ..............çÿ ..............æÿ ..............åÿ ..............äÿ ..............ãÿ ..............ßÿ ..............ßÿ